1

ELEMENTS 1

1. Torsional deflection is a significant consideration in the design

of shaft and the limit
should be in the range of _______ degrees/foot of length.
A. 0.004 to 0.006 B. 0.08 to 1
C. 0.006 to 0.008 D. 0.008 to 1
Answer: B
2. For a universal joint shaft angle should be _______degrees
maximum and much less
if in high rotational speed.
A. 12 B. 16
C. 15 D. 14
Answer: C
3. It is a good design practice for steel line shafting to consider a
limit to the linear
deflection of _______ inch/foot length maximum.
A. 0.050 B. 0.010
C. 0.020 D. 0.060
Answer: B
4. It is a rotating machine member that transmits power.
A. Cam B. Plate
C. Shaft D. Flywheel
Answer: C
5. A stationary member carrying pulleys, wheels and etc. that
transmits power is called:
A. Axle B. Propeller shaft
C. Turbine shaft D. Machine shaft
Answer: A
6. A line shaft is also known as:
A. Counter shaft B. Jackshaft
C. Main shaft D. Head shaft
Answer: C
7. Which of the following shafts intermediate between a line shaft
and a driven shaft?
A. Counter shaft B. Jackshaft
 2

C. Head shaft D. All of these

Answer: D
8. Short shafts on machines are called:
A. Core shafts B. Head shafts
C. Medium shafts D. Spindles
Answer: D
9. For shafts, the shear due to bending is a maximum at the
neutral plane where the normal stress is:
A. Constant B. Maximum
C. Minimum D. Zero
Answer: D
10. Criteria for the limiting torsional deflection vary from 0.08 per
foot of length for machinery shafts to _______ per foot.
A. 10 B. 20
C. 3 0 D. 40
Answer: A
11. The ability of metals to stand loads without breaking down.
A. Strain B. Stress
C. Elasticity D. Strength
Answer: D
12. Which of the following is not a classification of iron ore?
A. Siderite B. Hermanite
C. Sulfurite D. Magnetite
Answer: C
13. Ferrous metal contain a relatively large amount of:
A. Manganese B. Carbon
C. Sulfur D. Phosphorus
Answer: B
14. Which of the following metal is easy to chisel?
A. Alloy steel B. Manganese steel
C. Stainless steel D. Cast iron
Answer: B
15. The ability of material or metal to resist being crushed is:
A. Fatigue strength B. Bending strength
C. Torsional strength D. Compressive strength
Answer: D
 3

16. Which of the following is not part of the headstock?

A. Anvil B. Spindle
C. Motor D. Back pressure
Answer: A
17. Which of the following is not used to temper steel?
A. Oil bath B. Brine/salt bath
C. Steam bath D. Water bath
Answer: C
18. Which of the following is not a kind of cast iron?
A. Gray iron B. White iron
C. Malleable iron D. Lead iron
Answer: D
19. A machinery operation whereby the total rotates while the feed
is stationary.
A. Shaping B. Milling
C. Turning D. Reaming
Answer: B
20. What process does not belong to the group?
A. Brazing B. Soldering
C. Hardening D. Resistance welding
Answer: C
21. For transmission shafts, the allowable deflection is one degree
in a length of
______ diameters.
A. 10 B. 15
C. 20 D. 25
Answer: C
22. An old rule of thumb for transmission shafting is that the
deflection should not
succeed _____ of length between supports.
A. 0.01 in. per foot B. 0.02 in. per foot
C. 0.03 in. per foot D. 0.04 in. per foot
Answer: A
23. In general for machinery shafts, the permissible deflection may
be closer to:
A. 0.02 in/ft B. 0.01 in/ft
 4

C. 0.002 in/ft D. 0.030 in/ft

Answer: C
24. The speed at which the center of mass will equal the
deflecting forces on the shaft
with its attached bodies will then vibrate violently, since the
centrifugal force
changes its direction as the shaft turns.
A. Critical speed B. Geometrical speed
C. Mean speed D. Unit speed
Answer: A
25. For shaft, the minimum value of numerical combined shock
and fatigue factor to
be applied in every case to the computed bending moment is:

A. 1.0 B. 1.3
C. 1.5 D. 1.8
Answer: C
26. It is suggested that the design factor on the yield strength be
about 1.5 for the
smooth load, about 2 to 2.25 for minor shock loads and
______ when the loading
reverses during operation.
A. 3.0 B. 4.0
C. 3.5 D. 4.5
Answer: D
27. A column is called short column when:
A. The length is more than 30 times the diameter
B. Slenderness ratio is more than 120
C. The length is less than 8 times the diameter
D. The slenderness ratio is more than 32
Answer: C
28. For a circular shaft subjected to torque the value of shear
stress:
A. Is uniform throughout
B. Has maximum value at the axis
C. has maximum value at the surface
 5

D. Is zero at the axis and linearly increases to a maximum

value at the surface
of the shaft
Answer: D
29. The compression members tend to buckle in the direction of:
A. Axis of load B. Perpendicular to the
axis of load
C. Minimum cross-section D. Least radius of
gyration
Answer: D
30. A reinforced concrete beam is considered to be made up of:
A. Clad material B. Composite material
C. Homogeneous material D. Heterogeneous
material
Answer: D
31. Which tool does not belong to the group?
A. Vice grip B. Feeler gage
C. Torque wrench D. Adjustable wrench
Answer: B
32. Which of the following metals is non-magnetic?
A. Manganese steel B. Cast steel
C. Alloy steel D. Cast iron
Answer: A
33. One important skill that operators of machine tools must have
is an understanding
of measurement which demands:
A. Speed B. Precision
C. Sociability D. Neatness
Answer: B
34. Which of the following is not part of a lathe machine?
A. Fan B. Carriage
C. Headstock D. Tailstock
Answer: A
35. The machine which can flatten surface on a horizontal, vertical
or angular plane is:
A. Drilling machine B. Shaper machine
 6

C. Power saw D. Lathe machine

Answer: B
36. Which of the following is not the work of a machinist?
A. Reboring B. Overhauling
C. Grinding D. Boring
Answer: B
37. The area of the machine shop whose metal is being melted to
form a new shape is
the:
A. Foundry area B. Tool and die
C. Welding area D. Mass production area
Answer: A
38. A machine used in testing steel generally strike the specimen
with an energy from
220 to 265 ft – lb.
A. Izod test B. Charpy test
C. Rockwell test D. Test blocks
Answer: B
39. An iron in which most of the carbon is chemically combined
with the iron.
A. Cast iron B. Gray iron
C. White iron D. Malleable iron
Answer: C
40. Through how many degrees must an involute cam turn in
order to raise its follower
3 inches if the diameter of the base circle is 5 inches?
A. 58.7 degrees B. 180 degrees
C. 64.4 degrees D. 68.79 degrees
Answer: B
41. The column splice is used for increasing:
A. Strength of the column B. Cross-sectional area
of the column
C. Length of the column D. All of these
Answer: C
42. A simply supported beam has a uniform distributed load on it,
the bearing
 7

moment is:
A. Triangle B. Parabola
C. Semi-circle D. Rectangle
Answer: B
43. The power obtained by piston reaches flywheel through the:
A. Countershaft B. Crank shaft
C. Transmission shaft D. Line shaft
Answer: B
44. There are two types of crankshafts, namely:
A. Single piece and built up B. Forged and turned
C. Rotary and stationary D. None of these
Answer: A
45. Engine valves get open by means of:
A. Cam shaft B. Rocker shaft
C. Crank shaft D. Valve guard
Answer: A
46. The value of allowable stresses which are generally used in
practice for main
transmitting shafts is:
A. 282 kg/cm2 B. 423 kg/cm2
C. 599 kg/cm 2 D. 620 kg/cm2
Answer: A
47. The value of allowable stresses which are generally used in
practice for line shafts
carrying pulleys is:
A. 150 kg/cm2 B. 282 kg/cm2
C. 423 kg/cm2 D. 550 kg/cm2
Answer: C
48. The value of allowable stresses which are generally used in
practice for small, short
shafts, countershafts is:
A. 282 kg/cm2 B. 599 kg/cm2
C. 650 kg/cm 2 D. 750 kg/cm2
Answer: B
49. Torsional deformation in transmission shafts should be limited
to _______ in 20
 8

diameters.
A. 10 B. 20
C. 3 0 D. 40
Answer: A
50. Lateral deflection caused by bending should not exceed.
A. 0.001 in. per foot of length B. 0.005 in. par foot of
length
C. 0.01 in. per foot of length D. 0.05 in. per foot of
length
Answer: C
51. The space between the adjacent teeth.
A. Tooth B. Flank
C. Backlash D. Width
Answer: D
52. An iron has physical properties closely resembling those of
mild steel.
A. Malleable cast iron B. Malleable iron
C. White iron D. Gray iron
Answer: A
53. Gears used to transmit power between shafts axis of which it
intersect.
A. Sour gears B. Bevel gears
C. Helical gears D. Straight bevel gears
Answer: B
54. An important accessories of milling machines.
A. Milling machine vise B. Cutters
C. Ram D. Vertical milling
attachment
Answer: B
55. They are usually the steel or steel casting.
A. Mild steel B. Carbon steel
C. Fire box steel D. Drop-forge-dies
Answer: B
56. The cheapest and the most abundant engineering material.
A. Aluminum B. Steel
C. Cast iron D. Babbitt
 9

Answer: C
57. Milling machine accessories are used to hold milling cutter in
the milling machine.
A. Spindle-nose tooling B. Milling machine vise
C. Vertical milling attachment D. Milling machine arbors
Answer: D
58. The size of an equal-leg length fillet weld shall be based on
the length of the
largest.
A. Isosceles right triangle B. Square
C. Right triangle D. Rectangle
Answer: A
59.If gears cannot connect parallel shafts, they are called:
A. Cycloidal gears B. Helical gears
C. Spur gears D. Toothed gears
Answer: A
60. The path traced by a point moving at a fixed distance from an
axis and with a
uniform motion to the axis and a point moving such a path.
A. Helical motion B. Spherical motion
C. Translation D. Path of a point
Answer: A
61. Front axle should be live and:
A. Weak B. Dead
C. Strong D. None of these
Answer: B
62. The steering is coupled to the two front wheels by means of a:
A. Connecting rod B. Tie rod
C. Push rod D. Spindle
Answer: B
63. In the overdrive transmission system, the rotation speed of
____ rest higher than
that of engine’s speed.
A. Main shaft B. Crank shaft
C. Propeller shaft D. machine shaft
Answer: C
 10

64. A slip joint _____ the length of propeller shaft.

A. Increases B. Decreases
C. Keeps appropriate D. None of these
Answer: C
65. The transmission system incorporates clutch, gear box and
propeller shaft and:
A. Brake B. Differential
C. Steering D. Main shafting
Answer: B
66. The lay shaft moves ____ the primary shaft.
A. Equal to B. More than
C. Less than D. In the gear ratio
Answer: D
67. The main shaft is lifted ______ the lay shaft.
A. Before B. After
C. Parallel to D. Adjacent to
Answer: C
68. In the top gear, the rotational speeds of ____ remain the
same.
A. Primary and lay shafts B. main and lay shafts
C. Primary and main shafts D. Secondary and main
shafts
Answer: C
69. The primary and lay shafts rotate in _____ direction.
A. In the same B. Different
C. Reverse D. None of these
Answer: C
70. It is an integral part of a machine.
A. Spindle B. Axle
C. Counter shaft D. Machine shaft
Answer: D
71. The maximum stress which is reached during a tension test.
A. Stress B. Elasticity
C. Strain D. Tensile strength
Answer: D
 11

72. The frustums of two cones are used in a manner to permit a

variation of velocity
ratio between two parallel shafts.
A. Evans friction cones B. Bevel cones
C. Spherical cones D. Friction gearing
Answer: A
73. Weld-metal impact specimen shall be taken across the weld
with one face
substantially parallel to and within.
A. ¾” B. 1/32”
C. ¼” D. 1/16”
Answer: C
74. A joint between overlapping members in which the overlapped
edge of one
member is welded with a fillet weld.
A. A single welded lap joint
B. Double welded lap joint
C. A single-welded lap joint with backing
D. Tack weld
Answer: A
75. Imparts of reciprocating motion to a single-point cutting tool.
A. Dividing head B. Slotting attachment
C. Circular pitch D. Circular milling
attachment
Answer: B
76. The follower reciprocates or oscillates in a plane perpendicular
to the axis of
rotation of the cam.
A. Radial cam B. Cylindrical cam
C. Cam curves D. Tangential cam
Answer: A
77. Strength of a material is that of a stress intensity determined
by considering the
maximum test load to act over the original area of the test
specimens.
A. Yield point B. Ultimate strength
 12

C. Breaking strength D. Elastic strength

Answer: B
78. The follower reciprocates or oscillates in a plane parallel to the
axis of the rotation.
A. Cam curves B. Cylindrical cam
C. Tangential cam D. Radial cam
Answer: B
79. A test for pipe used for coiling in sizes 2 inches.
A. Flaring B. Crush
C. Flange D. Bend
Answer: D
80. An alloy of tin, copper, antimony or sometimes lead.
A. Gold B. Babbitt
C. Aluminum D. Cast iron
Answer: B
81. Stresses in shafts are analyzed through:
A. Torsional B. Bending
C. Axial D. All of these
Answer: D
82. What is the standard stock length?
A. 16 ft B. 20 ft
C. 24 ft D. All of these
Answer: D
83. Centrifugal separators that operate at speeds ______ also
employ these flexible
shafts.
A. 1000 to 3000 rpm B. 5000 to 10000 rpm

C. 15000 to 30000 rpm D. 20000 to 50000 rpm

Answer: D
84. Which of the following materials is used for shafting?
A. AISI 3240 B. AISI 3150
C. AISI 4063 D. AISI 33000
Answer: A
85. The process of redistributing the mass attached to a rotating
body in order to
 13

reduce vibrations arising from a centrifugal force.

A. Shaft coupling B. Shaft balancing
C. Shaft hooper D. Stator balancing
Answer: B
86. In many case the ______ of the shaft is an import design
feature.
A. Deflections B. Rigidity
C. Size D. Strength
Answer: B
87. Commercial shafting is made of:
A. Low carbon steel B. Cast iron
C. Brass D. Bronze
Answer: A
88. What is the most common material for shafting?
A. Wrought iron B. Cast iron
C. Mild steel D. Aluminum
Answer: C
89. Cold drawing produces a ______ shaft that hot rolling but with
higher residual
stresses.
A. Weaker B. Stronger
C. Harder D. None of these
Answer: B
90. Allowable stresses in shear equal to ______ are common in
design of a shaft.
A. 3000 to 5000 psi B. 4000 to 6000 psi
C. 5000 to 8000 psi D. 6000 to 10000 psi
Answer: C
91. A weld place in a groove between two abutting members.
A. Full-fillet weld B. Tack weld
C. Butt weld D. Fillet weld
Answer: C
92. A weld of approximately triangular cross-section that joins two
surfaces at
approximately right angles a sin lap joint, tee-joint, corner
joint.
 14

A. Single welded lap joint B. Fillet weld

C. Tack weld D. Butt weld
Answer: B
93. A corrosion occurs within or adjacent to a crevice formed by
contact with another
piece of the same or another metal.
A. Pitting B. Galvanic
C. Erosion D. Crevice
Answer: B
94. Wheels are sometimes used fro the transmission of high
power when
approximately constant velocity ratio is desired.
A. Bevel cones B. Friction gearing
C. Spur friction wheels D. Evans friction wheels
Answer: C
95. Gearing in which motion or power that is transmitted depends
upon the friction
between the surfaces in contact.
A. Bevel gears B. Spur friction wheels
C. Evans friction cones D. Friction gearing
Answer: D
96. A bevel gear of the same size mounted on a shaft at 90
degrees.
A. Crown gears B. Spur gears
C. Angular gears D. Miter gears
Answer: D
97. A fillet weld whose size is equal to the thickness of the thinner
joint member.
A. Butt joint B. Butt weld
C. Tack weld D. Full-fillet weld
Answer: D
98. The ratio of stress to the corresponding strain below the
proportional limit.
A. Stress-strain diagram B. Gage method
C. Modulus of elasticity D. Tensile strength
Answer: C
 15

99. The shearing strain of a block of metal, 3 inches high is

subject to a shearing high
force which distorts the top surface through a distance of
0.0036 inches.
A. 0.0015 rad B. 0.008 rad
C. 0.0010 rad D. 0.0012 rad
Answer: D
100. Determine the number of teeth in a driver of two spur gears
mesh which has a
velocity ratio of 0.75. The driven gear has 36 teeth.
A. 50 B. 46
C. 26 D. 48
Answer: D

ELEMENTS 2

1. A sine bar cannot be used without a/an

A. Angle gage B. Micrometer
C. Slip gage D. Vernier calliper
Answer: A
2. The tooth life is affected to the maximum extent by
A Gear grinding B. Gear shaping
C. Gear shaving D. Milling
Answer: A
3. The operation of finishing a drilled hole to the correct size is
known as
A. Counter boring B. Counter sinking
C. Reaming D. Spot facing
Answer: C
4. When the extreme outer corners of the cutting edges of a drill
wear away too
rapidly, it is an indication of
A. Not enough speed B. Too much rake angle
 16

C. Too high a speed D. B or C

Answer: D
5. Carbon steel drill should be operated at
A. Speed greater than that when using a high speed drill
B. Speeds less than that when using a high speed drill
C. The same speed as that using a high speed drill
D. None of the above
Answer: B
6. Removing the sharp edges from a piece of stock is referred to
as
A. Polish material B. Roughen material

C. Sharpen material D. Smooth material

Answer: B
7. Knurling is done to ________.
A. Boring B. Chamfering
C. Planning D. Turning
Answer: B
8. When cutting material in a lathe, the harder the material being
cut, the tool bit
should have
A. Less side rake B. More side rake
C. More top rake D. No side rake
Answer: A
9. When turning a piece of a round metal in a lathe, the front
clearance should be
smaller for
A. Cutting angles B. Large-diameter cutting

C. Small-diameter cutting D. None of these

Answer: C
10. After grinding a tool bit, the cutting edge should be
A. Case hardened B. Rubbed with emery
cloth
C. Rubbed with crocus cloth D. Stoned with an
oilstone
 17

Answer: D
11. Within the elastic limit, The stress id proportional to strain.
A. Hooke’s law B. Modulus of elasticity

C. Offset ratio D. Buckingham’s

principle
Answer: A
12. The corrosion of iron or iron-base-alloys.
A. Rusting B. Crazing
C. Chalking D. Fritting
Answer: A
13. Steel containing large amounts of mild nickel and chromium.
A. Carbon steel B. Stainless steel
C. Alloy steel D. Cast steel
Answer: B
14. It refers to any layer or deposit of extraneous material on the
heat-transfer-
surface.
A. Low line B. Pressure drop
C. Fouling D. Scaling
Answer: C
15. The total amount of permanent extension of the gage length
measured after the
specimen has fractured and is expressed as percentage
increase of the original
gage length.
A. Elongation B. Strain
C. Stress D. Elastic limit
Answer: A
16. It is used to enable milling machine to take climb milling cuts.
A. Helical driving mechanism B. Spindle
C. Read out D. Backlash eliminator
Answer: A
17. A weld made to hold the parts of a weldment in proper
alignment until the final
welds are made.
 18

A. Butt weld B. Tack weld

C. Fillet weld D. Full-fillet weld
Answer: B
18. The change in length per unit original length is:
A. Strain B. Stress
C. Deformation D. Elastic modulus
Answer: A
19. The temperature above which the alloy is liquid and will run.
A. Melting point B. Fow point
C. Pour point D. Liquids
Answer: A
20. A cone formed by elements which are perpendicular to the
elements of the pitch
cone at the large end.
A. Cone distance B. Back cone
C. Root cone D. Cone center
Answer: B
21. When cutting material in a lathe, the softer the material being
cut, the tool bit
should have
A. Any of these B. Double top rake
C. Less top rake D. More top rake
Answer: C
22. A piece of cast iron hold against an emery wheel will give off
A. Bright shiny sparks B. Dull yellow sparks

C. Red sparks D. No sparks

Answer: B
23. The alignment of coupling faces can be checked by
A. Inserting a feeler gage between the coupling faces at
various points around
the circumference
B. Inserting a thermometer
C. Rotating and measuring to nearest permanent fitting
D. Using an inside micrometer
Answer: A
 19

24. A drill bit has

A. No flutes B. 2 flutes
C. 3 flutes D. 4 flutes
Answer: B
25. Before applying layout for blue on a piece of metal, it must be
A. Cleaned B. Cold
C. Heated D. Roughened
Answer: A
26. A scriber is made from
A. Carbon steel B. Cold-rolled steel
C. Hot-rolled steel D. Too steel
Answer: D
27. Copper is annealed by hunting to a cherry red color and
A. Cooling slowly in air B. Dousing in cold water

C. Dousing in hot water D. Dousing in oil

Answer: A
28. When drilling a hole in a piece of work held in a lathe chuck
one would used the
A. Head stock B. Compound rest
C. Cross-feed D. Tailstock and drill
chuck
Answer: D
29. When using a drill press, the work should be held with
A. A pair of pliers B. A vise or clamp
C. Gloves on D. The hand
Answer: B
30. When a lathe is put into back gear, it will go
A. At a slower speed backwards B. At the same speed
backward
C. Faster D. Slower
Answer: D
31. A machine used for the testing of very thin steel or surface
layers.
A. Charpy test B. Izod test
C. Description test D. Rockwell test
 20

Answer: D
32. A gear is one in which angle is 90 degrees that is the pitch
cone has become a
plane.
A. Crown gear B. Angular gear
C. Miter gear D. Spiral gear
Answer: A
33. The deterioration of organic coating characterized as
completely.
A. Chalking B. Rusting
C. Shocking D. Fritting
Answer: C
34. Is a form of correction that develop on a high localized areas
on a metal surfaces.
A. Crevice B. Erosion
C. Galvanic D. Spitting
Answer: D
35. Test is designed primarily for application to electric-welded
tubing for detection of
lack of penetration or overlaps resulting from flash removal in
the weld.
A. Butt weld B. Paste
C. Lap weld D. Double butt weld
Answer: C
36. Have the same thermal and minimum film thickness limitation
as sleeve bearing.
A. Ball bearing B. Roller bearing
C. Thrust bearing D. Oil bearing
Answer: C
37. An oil storage roof formed to approximately the surface of a
right cone, supported
only at its periphery.
A. Self-supporting umbrella roof B. Self-supporting dome
roof
C. Supported cone roof D. Self-supporting cone
roof
 21

Answer: D
38. Test sometimes referred to as an upsetting test.
A. Bend B. Flaring
C. Flange D. Crush
Answer: A
39. What load P which cause a total deformation of 0.036 inch of a
steel rock which
has a cross-section area of 4 in2 and a length of 6 ft.
A. 55,000 lb B. 40,000 lb
C. 60,000 lb D. 50,000 lb
Answer: C
40. An oil storage tank roof formed to approximately a spherical
surface, supported
only at its periphery.
A. Self-supporting umbrella roof B. Self-supporting cone
roof
C. Self-supporting D. Supported cone roof
Answer: A
41. On a lathe, the dead center is used after
A. Boring B. Center-drilling
C. Drilling D. Reaming
Answer: B
42. To remove metal stock rapidly the file to use is a
A. Double – cut bastard B. Double – cut coarse

C. Rasp D. A and C
Answer: D
43. The best file to use when finishing sharp corners or slots and
grooves is the
A. Jeweler’s file B. Knife file
C. Mill file D. Square file
Answer: B
44. Never use a file
A. That is dirty B. With a tang
C. Without a handle D. Without oiling
Answer: C
 22

45. Which of the following information is necessary when ordering

a file?
A. Size B. Shape
C. Type of teeth D. All of the above
Answer: D
46. When filling a piece of metal in a lathe if short quick strokes
are used the finished
piece will probably
A. Be out of round B. Be perfect
C. Have small flat areas on the surfaces D. A and C
Answer: D
47. The best procedure when filling a piece of metal in a lathe is to
take ______.
A. Long fast stroke B. Long slow stroke
C. Short even stroke D. Short fast stroke
Answer: B
48. The safe edge of a file is
A. The end opposite the handle B. The one with the
handle
C. The edge with the handle D. None of these
Answer: C
49. Small pieces of metal clogged between the teeth on a file are
called
A. Bumps B. Clogs
C. Flats D. Pins
Answer: D
50. Finishing off a piece of metal with a real smooth finish can be
done by
A. Draw – filing B. Fat – filing
C. Milling – filing D. Side – filing
Answer: A
51. The unit of deformation is called:
A. Torsion B. Strain
C. Stress D. Shear
Answer: B
52. A circle bounding the bottom of the teeth.
 23

A. Addendum circle B. Addendum cylinder

C. Pitch circle D. Dedendum circle
Answer: D
53. A 3” diameter short shaft carrying 2 pulleys close to the
bearings transmit how
much horsepower if the shafts makes 280 rpm.
A. 199 Hp B. 198 Hp
C. 200 Hp D. 210 Hp
Answer: A
54. A cylindrical tank with 10 in. inside diameter contains oxygen
gas at 2500 psi.
Calculate the required wall thickness in (mm) under stress of
28,00 psi.
A. 11.44 mm B. 11.34 mm
C. 10.6 mm D. 10.3 mm
Answer: B
55. The minimum clearance allowed for meshing spur gears with a
circular pitch of
0.1571 and diametral pitch of 20. The spur gear has 25 teeth.
A. 0.007855 B. 0.007558
C. 0.008578 D. 0.007585
Answer: A
56. SAE steel that responds to heat treatment.
A. SAE 1060 B. SAE 1117
C. SAE 1030 D. SAE 1020
Answer: B
57. Which of the following is the differential of the shear equation?
A. Bending moment B. Load of the beam
C. Tensile strength of the beam D. Slope of the
beam
Answer: B
58. Which of the following materials to be utilized to reduce cost in
the manufacturing
of large worm gears?
A. Alloyed aluminum
B. Bronze rim with cast iron spider
 24

C. Cast iron rim with bronze spider

D. All of these
Answer: B
59. It is hardening treatment whereby a cast metal is being heated
to a very high
temperature then suddenly subjected to rapid cooling to
improve hardenability of
wear resistance is called:
A. Normalizing B. Tempering
C. Annealing D. Quenching
Answer: D
60. Determine the estimated weight of an A-36 steel plates size
3/16 x 6’ x 20’.
A. 919 lbs B. 1012 lbs
C. 829 lbs D. 735 lbs
Answer: A
61. For finishing a piece of work to size the file to use is the
A. Crossing file B. Double – cut fine –
tooth file
C. Mill file D. Single – cut fine – tooth file
Answer: D
62. For filing lead or babbit, use a
A. Lead float file B. Mile file
C. Vixen file D. A or C
Answer: A
63. A hacksaw blade with 32 TPI is best suited for cutting
A. Small tubing B. Conduit
C. Sheet metal under 18 gage D. Any of these
Answer: D
64. A coolant is usually used when cutting material in a power
hacksaw to
A. Absorb heat of friction B. Prevent the blade
from overheating C. Prevent the blade from losing D. All of
the above
Answer: D
 25

65. A hacksaw blades with 18 teeth per inch is best suited for
cutting
A. Aluminum B. Cast iron
C. Solid iron D. Any of these
Answer: D
66. When cutting a long thin piece of metal
A. Set the blade in the frame with the teeth facing toward
you
B. Turn the blade at right angles to the frame
C. Turn the blade upside down in the frame
D. Use a blade with fewer teeth per inch
Answer: B
67. The hacksaw blade should be placed in the frame with
A. One end looser than the other end
B. The teeth facing in any direction
C. The teeth pointing backward
D. The teeth pointing forward
Answer: D
68. A hacksaw blade with 34 teeth per inch should be used for
cutting
A. Brass B. Cast iron
C. Heavy D. Thin wall tubing
Answer: D
69. The best instrument for measuring thousandths of an inch is
the:
A. Caliper B. Micrometer
C. Pyrometer D. Tachometer
Answer: B
70. All hard hacksaw blade is best suited for work on
A. Brass B. Cast iron
C. Tool steel D. Any of these
Answer: D
71. The length of arc between the two sides of a gear tooth on the
pitch circle.
A. Circular thickness B. Axial plane
C. Helix angle D. Chordal curves
 26

Answer: A
72. Split pulley or pulley made of separate section bolted together
at the rim, the
maximum speed should be limited to about _______ % of the
maximum speed of
solid pulley.
A. 65 to 75% B. 45 to 50%
C. 55 to 60% D. 80 to 90%
Answer: C
73. Killed steel is very much associated with:
A. Manganese B. Sulphur
C. Phosphorus D. Silicon
Answer: D
74. Determine the estimated weight of an A-36 steel plate of size
1/2x4x8.
A. 280 kg B. 332 kg
C. 301 kg D. 297 kg
Answer: D
75. A type of welding whereby a wire or powder from the nozzle of
a spray gun is
fused by a gas flame, arc or plasma jet and the molten
particles are projected in a
from of a spray by means of compressed air or gas.
A. Electro-slug building B. Electro-beam welding
C. Plasma-arc welding D. Metal spray welding
Answer: D
76. Heating of metal above the critical temperature and then
cooling slowly usually in the furnace to reduce the hardness and
improve the machinability is called:
A. Normalizing B. Annealing
C. Tempering D. Quenching
Answer: B
77. Accident prevention is:
A. An association of employers, organization and
individuals
B. The foreman’s responsibility just as much as production
 27

C. The responsibility of top management

D. A job of a safety director
Answer: B
78. Major component of bronze casting.
A. Copper B. Manganese
C. Zinc D. Lead
Answer: A
79. Commonly utilized/cheapest shaft material available in the
market with carbon content of 0.28 to 0.34%.
A. SAE 4132 B. SAE 4320
C. SAE 1030 D. SAE 4130
Answer: C
80. Alloy steel known for its resistance to corrosion, abrasion and
wear that is usually
ideal for mill grinding of ore in cement and concentrator
application. It is usually
combined with molybdenum to increase the depth hardening.
A. Manganese chromium steel B. Chromium-moly steel
C. Chrome-nickel-moly steel D. Manganese-moly steel
Answer: B
81. A hacksaw blade with 14 TPI is best suited for cutting
A. Cold rolled steel B. Hot rolled steel
C. Structural steel D. Any of these
Answer: D
82. Files are divided into two general classes, namely
A. Flat shapes and round shapes B. Large and small
C. Rough and smooth D. Single-cut and double-
cut
Answer: D
83. A hacksaw blade can be the placed in a frame in
A. One position B. Two positions
C. Three positions D. Four positions
Answer: D
84. All hard hacksaw blade is one that
A. Has a hard back and flexible teeth
B. Has a flexible back and hard teeth
 28

C. Has the entire blade hardened

D. Will only fit a solid frame hacksaw
Answer: C
85. Hacksaw blade with 24 TPI is best suited for cutting
A. Brass and copper B. Sheet metal over 18
gages
C. Tubing D. Any of these
Answer: D
86. Hacksaw blades are made of
A. High speed B. Tool steel
C. Tungsten alloy steel D. Any of these
Answer: D
87. A flexible back hacksaw blade is one that has
A. A movable back B. Flexible ends
C. Only the back hardened D. Only the teeth
hardened
Answer: D
88. The flexible type hacksaw blade is best suited for work on
_______.
A. Aluminum B. Channel
C. Tubing D. Any of these
Answer: D
89. When lathe tool bit burns, it means that the
A. Speed is too low B. Speed is too fast
C. Material is too hard D. Material can not be cut
Answer: B
90. The lathe compound is used for
A. Angle cutting B. Grooving
C. Facing D. Any of these
Answer: D
91. Split pulley or pulley made of separate sections bolted
together at the rim, the
maximum speed should be limited to about _______% of the
maximum speed of
solid pulley.
A. 65 to 75% B. 45 to 50%
 29

C. 55 to 60% D. 80 to 90%
Answer: C
92. Major component of bronze casting is:
A. Copper B. Manganese
C. Zinc D. Lead
Answer: A
93. Galvanized steel plate is:
A. Aluminum B. Tin
C. Zinc D. Manganese
Answer: C
94. What heat treatment process cast steel materials of high
chrome, high
manganese, etc. type of steel be subjected fro the purpose of
machining process?
A. Annealing B. Tempering
C. Normalizing D. Quenching
Answer: A
95. Cast alloy steel for very high temperature application.
A. Manganese-nickel steel casting B. High chrome
steel casting
C. Chrome-nickel steel casting D. High manganese
casting
Answer: C
96. Flexible material used to seal pressurized fluids, normally
under dynamic
condition.
A. Nylon B. Seal
C. Teflon D. Packing
Answer: D
97. A type of gear tooth cut inside a cylinder or ring.
A. rack gear B. Ring gear
C. Miter gear D. Internal gear
Answer: D
98. It has molybdenum alloy except:
A. SAE 43xx B. SAE 41xx
C. SAE 6xxx D. SAE 5xxx
 30

Answer: D
99. To prevent leakage in dynamic seal:
A. Gasket B. Seals
C. Felts D. Packings
Answer: D
100. Which of the following elements when large quantity is
harmful to the ferrous metal?
A. Sulfur B. Silicon C. Zinc D.
Aluminum
Answer: A

ELEMENTS 3

1. A type of coupling that allows slight amount of torsional angular

flexibility due to
introduction with some elastic material cylindrically wrapped
around the bolts in the
flange.
A. Simple Elastic Bonded Coupling
B. Elastic Material Bushed Coupling
C. Elastic Material Bonded Coupling
D. All of these
Answer: B
2. Which of the following keys that is square or flat and tapered
with head?
A. Pin key B. Saddle key
C. Gib-head keys D. None of these
Answer: C
3. What are considered as the most common keys?
A. Flat keys B. Square keys
C. Saddle keys D. A and B
Answer: D
4. A key may either straight or tapered. It is usually a drive fit.
A. Pin key B. Saddle key
C. Gib-head key D. None of these
Answer: A
 31

5. A key with one of several patented methods of keying is driven

or pressed into a
hole that is small enough to close the slit, assembled in radial
direction.
A. Fit key B. Saddle key
C. Roll pin D. Pin key
Answer: C
6. Kennedy keys are also known as:
A. Tangential keys B. Normal keys
C. Saddle keys D. Roll pin
Answer: A
7. A key that allows the hub to move along the shaft but prevents
the rotation of the
shaft.
A. Woodruff key B. Feather key
C. Gibbs key D. Square key
Answer: B
8. Which one of the following types of fits used for involute spline?
A. Close fit B. Press fit
C. Sliding fit D. All of these
Answer: D
9. Used for permanent fits and are similar to involute splines
except that the pressure
angle is 14.5 degrees.
A. Separation load B. Stub serrations
C. Spline shaft D. Involute serrations
Answer: D
10. In the case of a knuckle joint, the pin is most likely to fail in:
A. Compression B. Shear
C. Tension D. Double shear
Answer: D
11. Heating above the transformation range, usually 1300 0F to
13500F and cooling
slowly to soften the metal and increase in machining.
A. Annealing B. Hardening
C. Normalizing D. Tempering
 32

Answer: A
12. Heating above the transformation temperature and quenching
usually in oil, for
the purpose of increasing the hardness.
A. Annealing B. Hardening
C. Normalizing D. Tempering
Answer: B
13. Reheating to a temperature below the transformation range,
followed by any
desired rate of cooling to attain the desired properties of the
metal.
A. Annealing B. Hardening
C. Tempering D. Stress relieving
Answer: C
14. Heating to a subcritical temperature about 1,1000F to 1,3000F
and holding at that
temperature for a suitable time for the purpose of reducing
internal residual
stresses.
A. Annealing B. Hardening
C. Tempering D. Stress Relieving
Answer: D
15. Heating to some 1000F above the transformation range with
subsequent cooling to
below that range in still air at room temperature to produce
uniform structure of
the metal.
A. Annealing B. Hardening
C. Normalizing D. Tempering
Answer: C
16. A machine tool used for producing holes in metal by the use of
a cutting tool called
drill.
A. Drilling machine C. Milling machine
B. Boring machine D. Broaching machine
Answer: A
 33

17. A machine tool used to form metal parts by removing metal

from a workpiece by
the use of a revolving cutter with many teeth each tooth having
a cutting edge
which removes its share of the stock.
A. Drilling machine C. Milling machine
B. Boring machine D. Broaching machine
Answer: C
18. A machine tool used to sharpen or shape tools by using an
abrasive wheel.
A. Tool grinder B. Shaper
C. Planer D. Power saw
Answer: A
19. A machine tools used to enlarge a hole by means of an
adjustable cutting tool with only one cutting edge.
A. Drilling machine C. Milling machine
B. Boring machine D. Broaching machine
Answer: B
20. A machine tool used to cut metal parts of light, medium and
large sections using a
reciprocating hacksaw blade.
A. Tool grinder B. Shaper
C. Planer D. Power saw
Answer: D
21. In case of sunk key:
A. the key is cut in both shaft and hub
B. The key way is cut in hub only
C. The key way is cut in shaft only
D. The key way is helical along the shaft
Answer: A
22. Splined shafts are generally for:
A. Air craft B. Automobiles
C. Bicycles D. Machine tools
Answer: B
23. Splines are used when:
A. The power to be transmitted is low
 34

B. The power to be transmitted is high

C. The torque is high
D. Axial relative motion between shaft hub is necessary
Answer: D
24. Which key normally used in wristwatches?
A. Kennedy key B. Sunk key
C. Tangent key D. None of these
Answer: D
25. If a square key and shaft are to be of the same material and of
equal strength, the
length of key would be equal to:
A. d B. 0.75 d
C. 1.2 d D. 1.5 d
Answer: C
26. A type of key that is used in self-aligning machine key made
by a side milling cutter
in the form of a segment of a disk.
A. Kennedy key B. Saddle key

C. Tangent key D. Woodruff key

Answer: D
27. A female mating member that forms a groove in the shaft to
which the key fits.
A. Key path B. Key way
C. Key holder D. Key hole
Answer: B
28. A square taper key fitted into a keyway of square section and
driven from opposite
ends of the hub is known as:
A. Barth key B. Feather key
C. Kennedy key D. Saddle key
Answer: C
29. A machine member employed at the interface of a pair of
mating male and female
circular cross-sectioned members to prevent relative angular
motion between
 35

those mating.
A. Key way B. Key
C. Constant key D. Variable key
Answer: B
30. A feather key is one of the following types of:
A. Sunk B. Tapered
C. Parallel D. Tangent
Answer: A
31. A machine tool used to machine flat or plane surfaces with a
single point cutting
tool.
A. Tool grinder B. Shaper
C. Planer D. Power saw
Answer: B
32. A machine tool used for production of flat surfaces on pieces
too large or too
heavy to hold in a shaper.
A. Tool grinder B. Shaper
C. Planer D. Power saw
Answer: C
33. A machine tool used to finish internal or external surfaces,
such as holes or
keyways by the use of a cutter called a broach, which has a
series of cutting edges
or teeth.
A. Drilling machine B. Boring machine
C. Milling machine D. Broaching machine
Answer: D
34. An alloy of copper and tin.
A. Brass B. Bronze
C. Iron D. Tin
Answer: B
35. An alloy of copper and zinc.
A. Brass B. Bronze
C. Iron D. Tin
Answer: A
 36

36. The process of forming metal parts by the use of dies after the
metal is heated to its plastic range.
A. Rolling B. Forging
C. Turning D. Casting
Answer: A
37. The process of forming a metal part by the use of a powerful
pressure from a
hammer or press to obtain the desired shape, after the metal
has been heated to
its plastic range.
A. Rolling B. Forging
C. Turning D. Casting
Answer: B
38. A manganese steel containing approximately 0.20% carbon.
A. SAE 1320 B. SAE 1230
C. SAE 2340 D. SAE 4230
Answer: A
39. A machine tool in which metal is removed by means of a
revolving cutter with
many teeth, each tooth having a cutting edge which remove its
share of the stock.
A. Milling machine B. Broaching machine
C. Lathe machine D. Boring machine
Answer: A
40. A metal turning machine tool in which the work, while revolving
on a horizontal
axis is acted upon by a cutting tool which is made to move
slowly (feed) in a
direction more less parallel to the axis of the work (longitudinal
feed).
A. Milling machine B. Broaching machine
C. Lathe machine D. Boring machine
Answer: C
41. Permanent keys made integral with shaft and fitting into key
ways broached into
the mating hub.
 37

A. Square keys B. Splines

C. Woodruff keys D. Kennedy keys
Answer: B
42. A type of square key with bottom two corners beveled is
called:
A. Flat key B. Feather key
C. Barth key D. Woodruff key
Answer: C
43. The bearing load on feather keys should not exceed:
A. 600 psi B. 800 psi
C. 1000 psi D. 1200 psi
Answer: C
44. The two keys are angularly spaced:
A. 450 B. 600
C. 75 0 D. 900
Answer: D
45. The three keys are angularly spaced:
A. 600 B. 900
C. 120 0 D. 1800
Answer: C
46. The permissible crushing stress is about ______ times the
permissible shear stress.
A. 1.5 B. 1.7
C. 1.9 D. 1.10
Answer: B
47. Practical considerations required that the hub length should be
at least to obtain a
good grip.
A. 0.2D B. 1.5D
C. 1.7D D. 1.9D
Answer: B
48. For three keys, a _____ percent overload often is used.
A. 10 B. 15
C. 20 D. 25
Answer: B
 38

49. A pin that is cylindrical in shape with a head on one end and a
radial through hole
in the other end.
A. Clevis pins B. Taper pins
C. Dowel pins D. Taper pins
Answer: A
50. Used for the attachment of levers, wheels and similar devices
onto shafts for light-
duty service.
A. Clevis pins B. Cotter pins
C. Dowel pins D. Taper pins
Answer: D
51. A machine tool used in the production of flat surfaces on
pieces too large or too
heavy or perhaps too awkward to hold in a shaper.
A. Shaper B. Planer
C. Tool grinder D. Power saw
Answer: B
52. It consists of shaping a piece by bringing it into contact with a
rotating abrasive
wheel.
A. Drilling B. Boring
C. Grinding D. Broaching
Answer: C
53. A tool used in measuring diameters.
A. Caliper B. Nanometer
C. Tachometer D. Pyrometer
Answer: A
54. Used to true and align machine tools, fixtures and works to
test and inspect size
trueness of finished work and to compare measurements
either heights or depths
or many other measurements.
A. Dial gauge B. Dial indicator
C. Tachometer D. Speedometer
Answer: B
 39

55. The ability of metal to be deformed considerably without

rupture.
A. Ductility B. Plasticity
C. Malleability D. Elasticity
Answer: B
56. The shop term used to include the marking or inscribing of
center points, circles,
arcs or straight lines upon metal surfaces, either curved or flat
for the guidance of
the worker.
A. Shaping B. Hobbing
C. Laying out D. Shaping
Answer: C
57. An operation of sizing and finishing a hole by means of a
cutting tool having
several cutting edges.
A. Notching B. Piercing
C. Turning D. Reaming
Answer: D
58. The operation of making a cone-shaped enlargement of the
end of a hole, as for a
recess for a flat head screw.
A. Countersinking B. Knurling
C. Squaring D. Perforating
Answer: A
59. The operation of enlarging a hole by means of an adjustable
cutting tool with only
one cutting edge.
A. Drilling B. Broaching
C. Milling D. Boring
Answer: D
60. An imaginary circle passing through the points at which the
teeth of the meshing
gears contact each other.
A. Pitch circle B. Addendum circle
C. Dedendum circle D. Base circle
 40

Answer: A
61. The key fits into mating grooves in the shaft and mating
member is called:
A. Key way B. Key path
C. Key hole D. None of these
Answer: A
62. Used as couplings or in addition to overload, where there is
danger of injury to
machines or to material in process.
A. Flange couplings B. Involute serrations
C. King pins D. Shear pins
Answer: D
63. A coupling that transmits power via the frictional forces
induced buy pulling the
flanges toward each other over slotted tapered sleeves is
known as:
A. Flange coupling B. Flange compression
coupling
C. Ribbed compression coupling D. Rigid coupling
Answer: B
64. What is used for absorbing some shock and vibration that may
appear on one shaft
and of preventing the occurrence of reversed stresses caused
by the shaft
deflecting at the coupling.
A. Flange coupling B. Flexible coupling
C. Rigid coupling D. None of these
Answer: B
65. For a single Hooke’s coupling the shaft angle should not be
greater than:
A. 100 B. 120
C. 15 0 D. 300
Answer: C
66. A universal coupling is:
A. A rigid coupling B. A type of flange coupling
 41

C. Used for collinear shafts D. Used for non-collinear

shafts
Answer: D
67. A flange coupling is:
A. Flexible B. Used for collinear shafts
C. Used for non-collinear shafts D. Used for small
shafts rotating at low speed
Answer: B
68. Which of the following mechanical devices is used for uniting
or connecting parts
of a mechanical system?
A. Coupling B. Keys
C. Splines D. Flexible coupling
Answer: A
69. What is the rotating member used in transmitting power?
A. Shaft B. Counter shaft
C. Axle D. Washer
Answer: A
70. For machinery shafts, the permissible deflection is
approximately:
A. 0.02 in./ft B. 0.03 in//ft
C. 0.01 in./ft D. 0.05 in./ft
Answer: A
71. A type of bolt intended for use in bolting wooden parts
together or wood to metal.
It has a short portion of shank just underneath a round head,
which is designed to
keep the bolt form turning in the wood when the nut is
tightened.
A. U-bolt B. Carriage bolt
C. Eye bolt D. Stud bolt
Answer: B
72. The number of teeth per inch of pitch diameter and which
gives some indications
of the size of the gear teeth.
A. Module B. Pitch circle
 42

C. Diametral pitch D. Circular pitch

Answer: C
73. The distance form the center of one tooth of a gear to the
center of the next
consecutive tooth measured on the pitch.
A. Circular pitch B. Module
C. Diametral pitch D. Pitch circle
Answer: A
74. The portion of a gear tooth that projects above or outside the
pitch circle.
A. Top relief B. Dedendum
C. Addendum D. Tooth space
Answer: C
75. The portion of the gear tooth space that is cut below the pitch
circle and is equal
to the addendum plus the clearance.
A. Top root B. Dedendum
C. Addendum D. Top land
Answer: B
76. When meshed with a gear, it is used to change rotary motion
to reciprocating
motion.
A. Gear shaft B. Gear tooth
C. Gear rack D. Gear motor
Answer: C
77. A kind of gear used for heavy duty works where a large ratio of
speed is required
and is extensively used in speed reducers.
A. Bevel gears B. Worm gears
C. Helical gears D. Spiral gears
Answer: B
78. A kind of gears used to transmit motion from one shaft to
another shaft at an
angle to the first.
A. Bevel gears B. Worm gears
C. Helical gears D. Spiral gears
 43

Answer: A
79. The uniform heating of steel above the usual hardening
temperatures, followed by
cooling freely in air.
A. Annealing B. Normalizing
C. Hardening D. Tempering
Answer: B
80. The operation of cooling a heated piece of work rapidly by
dipping it in water,
brine or oil.
A. Quenching B. Tempering
C. Normalizing D. Annealing
Answer: A
81. A coupling that employs fluid to provide angular flexibility
between the input and
output shafts.
A. Rigid coupling B. Flexible coupling
C. Hydraulic coupling D. Oldham coupling
Answer: C
82. Which of the following type of coupling is used with collinear
shafts?
A. Collar coupling B. Rigid coupling
C. Flexible coupling D. Hydraulic coupling
Answer: B
83. A type of coupling used to connect shafts that have lateral
misalignment.
A. Compression coupling B. Collar coupling
C. Chain coupling D. Oldham coupling
Answer: D
84. A coupling that is composed of two slotted members, which
are connected by a
continuous steel spring and lies in the slots.
A. Ajax coupling B. Falk coupling
C. Lord coupling D. Slip coupling
Answer: B
 44

85. Shaft couplings are used in machinery for several purposes.

The most common
purpose of shaft coupling is:
A. To provide for the connection of units that are
manufactured separately
B. To provide for misalignment of the shafts
C. To reduce the transmission of shock loads from one
shaft to another D. All of these
Answer: D
86. Typical hub length falls between _____ where D is the shaft
diameter.
A. 1.2D and 1.8D B. 1.25D and 2.4D
C. 1.30D and 2.5D D. 1.35D and 3.0D
Answer: B
87. The diameter of the large end of the pin should be _____ the
shaft diameter.
A. ¼ B. 1/3
C. ½ D. 3/2
Answer: A
88. The most common type of sliding fastener and is widely used
on doors is the:
A. Pawl fastener B. Magnetic fastener

C. Sliding latch D. Screw fastener

Answer: C
89. When the key is not fitted on all four sides experience has
shown that, the
permissible crushing stress is about _____ times the
permissible gear stress. A. 1.3 B. 1.5

C. 1.7 D. 1.9
Answer: C
90. The mechanical fastening that connects shafts together for
power transmission.
A. Coupling B. Key
C. Splines D. None of these
 45

Answer: A
91. A method used in softening a piece of metal that is too hard a
machine and is done
by heating steel slowly above the usual hardening
temperature, keeping it at heat
for ½ to 2 hours, then cooling slowly, preferably in a furnace.
A. Broaching B. Quenching
C. Normalizing D. Annealing
Answer: D
92. The total permissible variation in the size of dimension: the
difference between
the limits of size.
A. Allowance B. Tolerance
C. Variance D. Interface
Answer: B
93. The operation of machining the end of a workpiece to make
the end square with
the axis.
A. Squaring B. Buffing
C. Lapping D. Honing
Answer: A
94. The clearance between the tooth profiles of a gear tooth.
A. Tooth space B. Backlash
C. Flank D. Width
Answer: B
95. A mechanism which usually do the indexing in a machine tool.
A. Slotter B. Chuck
C. Dividing head D. Indexer
Answer: C
96. A material that can wear away a substance softer than itself.
A. Phenol B. Abrasive
C. Tungsten D. Chromium
Answer: B
97. A cylindrical bar of steel with threads formed around it and
grooves or flutes
 46

running lengthwise in it, intersecting with the threads to form

cutting edges. It is
used to cut internal threads.
A. Groove B. Lap
C. Tap D. Flute
Answer: C
98. A set of gages consisting of thin strips of metal of various
thickness mounted in a
steel case or holder and is widely used for measuring and
checking clearances.
A. Feeler gage B. Depth gage
C. Line center gage D. Lay-out gage
Answer: A
99. A machine tool which is very similar to a shaper except that
the ram reciprocates
vertically rather than horizontally.
A. Lathe B. Grinder
C. Planer D. Slotter
Answer: D
100. A machine tool used principally to machine flat or plane
surfaces with single-
point cutting tool.
A. Grinder B. Shaper
C. Planer D. Turret lathe
Answer: B

ELEMENTS 4

1. Point angle of 1350 on drills is used for:

A. Bakelite hard rubbers and fibrous plastic
B. Hard steels and nickel alloys
C. Thin sheets metal
 47

D. B and C
Answer: D
2. A twist drill is specified by:
A. Its diameter and lip angle B. Its shank and diameter
C. Shank, material and diameter D. Shank, material and
flute size
Answer: C
3. The usual value of helix angle of a drill is:
A. 300 B. 600
C. 110 0 D. 1200
Answer: A
4. The helix angle on a high speed steel twist drill for drilling cast
iron is of the order
of:
A. 12-220 B. 24-320
C. 35-400 D. 40-450
Answer: B
5. Dressing is:
A. An inspection method for castings
B. A method of cleaning the castings
C. A method of deoxidizing of molten metal
D. The formation of oxides on them molten metal surface
Answer: D
6. Sweep pattern is used for molding parts having:
A. Complicated shape having intricate details
B. Rectangular shape
C. Uniform symmetrical shape
D. None of the above
Answer: C
7. Which of the following processes that hydraulic fluid acts as
transfer media.
A. Electron Beam Machining
B. Electro – discharge Machining
C. Iron Beam Machining
D. Water Jet Machining
Answer: D
 48

8. Wiping is the process of

A. Applying flux during welding process
B. Cleaning the welded surface after the welding operation
is over
C. Connecting load pipes by soldering alloy
D. Low temperature welding
Answer: C
9. Ornaments are cast by:
A. Continuous Casting B. Die Casting
C. Gravity Casting D. Pressed Casting
Answer: C
10. In such casting process:
A. Molten metal is fed into the cavity in metallic mould by
gravity
B. Metal is poured into die cavity and after a predetermined
time the mould
is inverted to permit a part of metal still in the molten
state to flow out of
cavity
C. Cavity is filled with a pre-calculated quantity of metal and
a core or plunger
inserted to force the metal into cavity
D. Metal is forced into mould under high pressure
Answer: B
11. A kind of bolts which has no head an instead has threads on
both ends.
A. Stud bolts B. Acme threaded bolts
C. Square threaded bolts D. Hex bolts
Answer: A
12. A kind of chuck which has reversible jaws which could be
adjusted separately.
A. Collet chuck B. Independent chuck
C. Four jaw chuck D. Two jaw chuck
Answer: B
13. A tool which when pressed into a finished hole in a piece of
work, provides centers
 49

on which the piece may be turned or otherwise machined.

A. Mash B. Butt
C. Mandrel D. Wobble
Answer: C
14. A kind of chuck which should not be used where extreme
accuracy is required.
A. Collet chuck B. Magnetic chuck
C. Four jaw chuck D. Universal chuck
Answer: D
15. The process of checking or producing checkers on the surface
of a piece by rolling
checkered depressions into the surface.
A. Knurling B. Hemming
C. Breading D. Embossing
Answer: A
16. It fits into the main spindle of a lathe and is so called because
it acts as a bearing
surface on which the work rests. It revolves with the work.
When compared with
the hardness of the dead center in the tailstock, it is usually
soft and is so made
since it does no work.
A. Ram center B. Spindle center
C. Live center D. Bearing center
Answer: C
17. A gripping device with two or more adjustable jaws set radially.
A. Chuck B. Carriage
C. Tailstock D. Fan
Answer: A
18. Steel balls for ball bearings are manufactured by:
A. Turning B. Rolling
C. Casting D. Cold heading
Answer: D
19. Addendum of a cycloidal gear tooth is:
A. Cycloid B. Epicycloids
C. Straight rack D. Involute
 50

Answer: B
20. In a lathe, it comprises the main spindle, the necessary
mechanism for obtaining
the various spindle speed and also certain gears which are
used to operate the
quick-change gear mechanism.
A. Headstock B. Carriage
C. Tailstock D. Fan
Answer: A
21. In Carthias process
A. Molten metal is fed into the cavity in metallic mould by
gravity
B. Metal is poured into die cavity and after a
predetermined time the mould
is inverted to permit a part of metal steel in molten state
to flow out of
cavity.
C. Cavity is filled with a precalculated quantity of metal and
a core or plunger
is inserted to force the metal into cavity
D. Metal is forced into mould under high pressure
Answer: C
22. What is the purpose of riser?
A. Feed the casting at a rate consistent with the rate of
solidification
B. Act as a reservoir for molten metal
C. Help feed the casting until all solidification takes place
D. Feed molten metal from pouring basin to gas.
Answer: C
23. The mould for casting ferrous materials
A. Copper B. High carbon steel
C. Low carbon steel D. Medium carbon steel
Answer: A
24. Dilatometer is used to find out which property of molding
sand?
A. Fineness B. Hot Strength
 51

C. Moisture Content D. Permeability

Answer: A
25. Select the one that is not an angle measuring device.
A. Angle Iron B. Bevel protector
C. Combination D. Sine bar
Answer: A
26. The darft allowance on metallic pattern as compared to
wooden ones is:
A. More B. Same
C. less D. More/less depending
on size
Answer: C
27. The pressure of inoculation is used:
A. To clean the casting
B. To decrease the melting temperature of a cast metal
C. To change the chemical composition of a cost metal
D. To modify the structure and properties of a cast metal
Answer: D
28. Tumbling is done so as to:
A. Clean the surface of small parts B. Get surface
finish
C. Stress relieve the components D. Plate the surface
Answer: A
29. What is referred to as a gate?
A. A passage through which metal is poured into the mould
B. A passage through which metal rises when the mould is
filled
C. A passage that finally leads molten metal from the
runner into the mould
cavity
D. A vent hole to allow for the hot gases to escape
Answer: D
30. A sprue is:
A. A tool used in mould repairing
B. A process of cleaning castings
 52

C. A chemical that is added to molten materials for sound

castings
D. A vertical passage through the cope and joining the
pouring basin to the runner
Answer: A
31. The process of heating a piece of steel to a temperature within
or above critical
range and cooling rapidly.
A. Normalizing B. Hardening
C. Annealing D. Tempering
Answer: B
32. Welding operation in which a non-ferrous filler metal melts at a
temperature
below that of the metal joined but is heated above 450 0C.
A. Gas welding B. Spot welding
C. Brazing D. Steam welding
Answer: C
33. Uniting two pieces of metal by means of a different metal
which is applied
between the two in molten state.
A. Casting B. Welding
C. Soldering D. Brazing
Answer: C
34. Fusion process in which the metal is heated into a state of
fusion permitting it to
flow together into a solid joint.
A. Electric arc welding B. Gas welding
C. Spot welding D. Projection welding
Answer: A
35. Joining metal by means of high current at low voltage. During
the passage of
current, pressure by the electrodes produces a forge weld.
A. Spot welding B. Resistance welding

C. Stem welding D. Gas welding

Answer: B
 53

36. A device for accurately measuring diameters.

A. Radiometer B. Profilometer
C. Spectrometer D. Micrometer
Answer: D
37. A group of thin steel in strips for measuring clearances.
A. Distortion gage B. Feeler gage
C. Line center gage D. Deflection gage
Answer: B
38. A hand tool used to measure engine crank web deflections.
A. Distortion gage B. Feeler gage
C. Line center gage D. Deflection gage
Answer: A
39. A hand tool used to measure tension on bolts.
A. Indexer B. Torque wrench
C. Torsionmeter D. Tensionmeter
Answer: B
40. The permissible variation in the size of a dimension: the
difference between the
limits of size.
A. Allowance B. Variance
C. Clearance D. Tolerance
Answer: D
41. Hacksaw blade that has the same number of teeth as given
below are available. Which one would you chose for cutting
brass?
A. 18 teeth B. 24 teeth
C. 28 teeth D. 31 teeth
Answer: B
42. A plug gage is used to measure
A. Cylindrical bores B. Screw thread
C. Spherical holes D. Taper bores
Answer: A
43. When large number of components are turned and parted off a
bar the chuck generally used is the ______.
A. Collet chuck B. Four jaw chuck
C. Magnetic chuck D. Two jaw chuck
 54

Answer: C
44. Which of the following is the cutting speed of brass?
A. 30 m/min B. 40 m/min
C. 50 m/min D. 60 m/min
Answer: B
45. Under cutting is:
A. An operating of cutting extra deep groove
B. An operation of cutting a groove next to a shoulder on a
piece of work
C. Cutting from the of work piece
D. An operation of cutting extra wide threads
Answer: C
46. Permeability of a foundry sand is:
A. The capacity to hold moisture B. Distortion of binder in
sand
C. Fineness of sand D. Porosity to allow the escape
of gases
Answer: A
47. Quick return mechanism is used in a
A. Drilling machine B. Grinder
C. Lathe D. Shaper
Answer: D
48. Draft on a pattern is provided for:
A. Facilitating pattern making
B. Easy lifting of the casting
C. Facilitating withdrawal of the pattern from the mould

D. Providing for shrinkage of the cating

Answer: D
49. Mandrel are used to hold
A. Cutting tools B. Drill bits
C. Face plate D. Hollow work pieces
Answer: D
50. The operation of enlarging a hole is called:
A. Boring B. Counter Sinking
C. Drilling D. Reaming
 55

Answer: A
51. A gear with teeth on the outer cylindrical surface.
A. Outer gear B. External gear
C. Spiral gear D. Helical gear
Answer: B
52. The diameter of a circle coinciding with the top of the teeth of
an internal gear.
A. Pitch diameter B. Root diameter
C. Internal diameter D. Central diameter
Answer: C
53. A circle coinciding with a tangent to the bottom of the tooth
space.
A. Root circle B. Pitch circle
C. Addendum circle D. Dedendum circle
Answer: A
54. The total depth of a tooth space equal to addendum plus
dedendum.
A. Full depth B. Working depth
C. Whole depth D. Dedendum
Answer: C
55. The depth of tooth space below the pitch circle.
A. Dedendum B. Working depth
C. Full depth D. Tooth depth
Answer: A
56. The gear of teeth to each mm pitch diameter.
A. Diametral pitch B. Module
C. Circular pitch D. English module
Answer: A
57. A machine tool in which abrasive wheel is used as cutting tool
to obtain a very
smooth finish.
A. Drill B. Grinder
C. Planer D. Shaper
Answer: B
58. It is used to produce a variety of surfaces by using a circular-
type cutter with
 56

multiple teeth.
A. Grinding machine B. Shaper
C. Drilling machine D. Milling machine
Answer: D
59. It is used principally to machine flat or plane surfaces with a
single-point tool.
A. Drill B. Shaper
C. Planer D. Tool grinder
Answer: B
60. Cutting a hole by means of rotating tool or the work may
revolve and to the tool
remain fixed as in the lathe.
A. Piercing B. Notching
C. Boring D. Perforating
Answer: C
61. In up cut milling the work piece is fed
A. Against the rotating cutter B. At an angle of 60o to
the center
C. At right angle to the cutter D. In the direction of the
cutter
Answer: A
62. Sprue is the passage provided for the
A. Out flow B. In flow
C. Smooth flow D. Solidification of the
molten material
Answer: B
63. Feed in a lathe is expressed in
A. mm B. mm per degree
C. mm per revolution D. rpm
Answer: C
64. Rapping allowance is provided on a pattern to take care of
A. Shrinkage B. Machining
C. Distortion D. Easy withdrawal
Answer: D
65. Upsetting is the term used in one of the following operations
A. Casting B. Drilling
 57

C. Forging D. Turning
Answer: C
66. One of the material used for making surface plate is:
A. Brass B. Granite
C. Stainless steel D. Wood
Answer: B
67. Feeler gages are used for measuring the:
A. Clearances between mating parts B. Pitch of screw
threads
C. Radius of curvature D. Thickness of
plates
Answer: A
68. Chuck used on turret lathe is
A. Collet chuck B. Four jaw self centering
chuck
C. Magnetic chuck D. Three jaws independent
chuck
Answer: D
69. Routing prescribes
A. Inspection of final product
B. Proper utilization of machine
C. Proper utilization of man power
D. The flow of materials in the joint
Answer: D
70. Cope in foundry practice refers to
A. Bottom half of molding box
B. Coating on the mold face
C. Middle portion of the molding box
D. Top half of molding
Answer: D
71. One of the following is not a tap used for cutting threads in
holes.
A. Tapping tap B. Plug tap
C. Taper tap D. Bottoming tap
Answer: A
72. An index or dividing head.
 58

A. A part of a drill press C. Not used to cut helixes

B. Used to rotate the work D. Always manually
operated
Answer: B
73. Galvanized iron is a term referring to iron coated with:
A. Tin B. Zinc
C. Magnesium D. Aluminum
Answer: B
74. The moment of inertia of a rectangle whose base is “b” and
height “h” about its
base is:
A. bh3/12 B. bh/36
C. bh3/3 D. bh2/4
Answer: C
75. In usual spur gearing:
A. The pitch circle and the base circle are the same
B. Working depth includes the clearance
C. Tooth outline are usually involute curves
D. Tooth outline are always cycloidal curves
Answer: C
76. A stainless steel is obtained principally by the use of the
following alloying
element.
A. Chromium B. Tungsten
C. Carbon D. Phenol
Answer: A
77. One of the following is not a common term relating to the
classification of fits.
A. Tunking B. Snug
C. Medium force fit D. Bound
Answer: D
78. Herringbone gears are gears which:
A. Do not operate on parallel shaft
C. Consist of two left handed helical gears
B. Have a line of contact between the teeth
D. Tend to produce thrust on the shafts
 59

Answer: B
79. Internal stresses existing in a welded connection.
A. Are not relieved when the weld is peened
B. Are not relieved by heat treatment
C. May be relieved when the weld is peened
D. Are relieved by x-ray analysis
Answer: A
80. In general, the design stress and factor of safety are related as
follows:
A. Design stress = ultimate stress times factor of safety
B. Design stress = ultimate stress divided by factor of
safety
C. Design stress = design stress divided by ultimate stress
D. Design stress = factor of safety divided by design stress
Answer: B
81. A vent wire is use in
A. Foundry B. Hot forging
C. Cold forging D. Fitting
Answer: B
82. The purpose of chaplets is to:
A. Ensure directional solidification
B. Function a lower and upper parts of the molding box
C. Provide efficient venting
D. Support the cores
Answer: A
83. Angle plate is used for
A. Cutting tapers in a lathe B. Cutting gears in a
shaper
C. Cutting gears in a milling D. Fixing job out angles
in a grinder
Answer: B
84. Cores are used in a mould to make it
A. Hollow B. Smooth
C. Strong D. Symmetrical
Answer: A
85. Pipes subjected to high pressures are generally made by
 60

A. Centrifugal casting B. Extrusion

C. Pressure casting D. Slush casting
Answer: A
86. In a typical lathe machining, discontinuous chips of ____ are
formed when
machining
A. Carbon steel B. Cooper steel
C. Copper D. Steel at high speeds
Answer: C
87. Permeability, in relation to molding sands, is high for
A. Coarse grains B. Fine grains
C. Medium grains D. Round grains
Answer: A
88. The purpose of tumbler gears in lathe is to:
A. Cut gears
B. Cut threads
C. Give desired direction of movement to the lathe carriage

D. Reduce spindle speeds

Answer: C
89. For machining the flange of a 90 elbow on a lathe which of the
following holding
devices is used?
A. Angle plate B. Catch plate
C. Face plate D. lathe plate
Answer: C
90. Which of the following is not part of combination set?
A. Bevel protractor B. Dial gage
C. Scale D. Try square
Answer: C
91. A group of thin steel strips for measuring clearances.
A. Depth gage B. Feeler gage
C. Lay-out gage D. Clearance gage
Answer: B
92. A hand tool used to measure tension on bolts.
A. Indexer B. Torsionmeter
 61

C. Torque wrench D. Tensionmeter

Answer: C
93. A material that can wear away a substance softer than itself.
A. Abrasive B. Corrosive
C. Tungsten D. Alloy
Answer: A
94. The material used in high speed processes.
A. High speed steel B. Chromium
C. Brass D. Aluminum
Answer: A
95. An alloy of copper and zinc.
A. Chromium B. Bronze
C. Brass D. Aluminum
Answer: C
96. An alloy of copper, tin and small amount of phosphorous.
A. Chromium B. Bronze
C. Brass D. Aluminum
Answer: B
97. The process of working metals by the application of sudden
blows or by steady
pressure.
A. Welding B. Extursion
C. Forging D. Swaging
Answer: C
98. A welding operation in which a non-ferrous filler metal melts at
a temperature
below that of the metal joined but is heated but is heated
above 4500C.
A. Brazing B. Spot welding
C. Gas welding D. Projection welding
Answer: A
99. The operation of cooling a heated piece of work rapidly by
dipping it in water,
brine or oil.
A. Tempering B. Annealing
C. Quenching D. Normalizing
 62

Answer: C
100. A machine tool used to machine flat surfaces.
A. Shaper B. Planer
C. Grinder D. Lathe
Answer: A

ELEMENTS 5

1. Top surface joining two sides of thread in screw is known as:

A. Pitch B. Top Flank
C. Top Land D. Crest
Answer: D
2. Screw thread projecting from a cylindrical surface is a:
A. Thread Series B. Thread Shear
C. Straight Thread D. Taper Thread
Answer: D
3. The conical surface at the starting end of the thread is called:
A. Pitch Cone B. Chamfer
C. Crest D. Flute
Answer: B
4. The surface connecting the crest and roots of the screw thread.
A. Lead Angle B. Length of Engagement

C. Top Land D. Flank

Answer: D
5. The theoretical profile of the thread for a length of one pitch in
the axial plane on
 63

which design forms of both the external threads are based.

A. Basic form of thread B. Effective Thread
C. Basic profile of thread D. Design form of
external thread
Answer: C
6. The top and bottom-land for gears is similar formed as to crest
and ______ for
screw thread.
A. Flank B. Root
C. Flank Tooth D. Top Land
Answer: B
7. Some experiments made at Cornell University showed that
experience mechanic
could bread a _______ bolt due to nut tightening.
A. 3/8 inch B. 5/8 inch
C. ½ inch D. 7/16 inch
Answer: B
8. The angle included between the sides of the thread measured
in an axial plane in a
screw thread.
A. Angle of Thread B. Angle between thread or 40
deg
C. Helix Angle Thread D. Half Angle Thread
Answer: A
9. Length of contact between two mating parts in a screw and nut
threads measured
axially is called:
A. Arc of Contact B. Depth of Engagement
C. Length of Engagement D. Axis of Contact
Answer: B
10. Major and minor diameters are commonly used in:
A. Screw Thread B. Bolt
C. Gear D. All of these
Answer: A
11. The hardness of steel increase if it contains:
A. Martensite B. Pearlite
 64

C. Austenite D. All of these

Answer: A
12. How do you call a steel with 0.8% carbon and 100% pealite?
A. Austenite B. Solidus
C. Hyper-eutectoid D. Eutectoid
Answer: D
13. What is the range of the tensile strength of common varieties
of cast iron?
A. 40 – 60 Mpa B. 150 – 180 Mpa
C. 840 – 500 Mpa D. 1500 – 1650 Mpa
Answer: C
14. Fatigue failure occurs when a part is subjected to:
A. Compressive stress B. Tensile stress
C. Torsional stress D. Fluctuating stress
Answer: D
15. Paramagnetic alpha iron changes to gamma iron at what
temperature?
A. 4400C B. 9100C
C. 970 C0 D. 16390C
Answer: B
16. The diameter of the washer is generally:
A. Equal to then diameter of the bolt
B. Slightly more than the diameter of the bolt
C. Slightly than the diameter of the bolt
D. Of any size that suits the application
Answer: B
17. The compression members tend to buckle in the direction of:
A. Axis of load C. Least radius of
gyration
B. Minimum cross-section D. perpendicular to the
axis of load
Answer: C
18. A kinematic chain needs a minimum:
A. 2 links and 2 turning pairs C. 4 links and 4 turning
pairs
 65

B. 3 links and turning pairs D. 3 links and 2 turning

pairs
Answer: C
19. Which of the following pairs is formed if shaft is revolving in a
bearing?
A. Lower pair B. Turing pair
C. Sliding pair D. Cylindrical pair
Answer: A
20. How many links are there in a pantograph?
A. 3 B. 4
C. 5 D. 6
Answer: B
21. Nominal diameter of bolt is the:
A. Major Diamter B. Minor Diamter
C. Stress Area D. Mean Diameter
Answer: A
22. A ______ is a kind of thread in which the width of the thread
and the space between threads are approximately equal.
A. Square Thread B. Acme Thread
C. Butress Thread D. Whit Worth Thread
Answer: A
23. A kind of thread that is generally used.
A. UNEC B. UNC
C. UNF D. UNEF
Answer: B
24. A type of bolt commonly used in the construction that is
threaded in both ends.
A. Stud Bolt B. Acme Threaded Bolt
C. Square Threaded Bolt D. Hex Bolt
Answer: A
25. A hand tool used to measure tension in bolts.
A. Shaver B. Tachometer
C. Tensor D. Torque Wrench
Answer: D
26. One of the following is not a tap used for cutting threads in
holes.
 66

A. Tapping Tap B. Plug Tap

C. Taper Tap D. Bottoming Tap
Answer: A
27. Type of bolt intended for use in bolting wooden parts together
or wood to metal.
It has a short portion of shank just underneath a round head,
which is designed to
keep the bolt from turning in the wood when the nut is
tightened.
A. U-bolt B. Carriage Bolt
C. Eye Bolt D. Stud Bolt
Answer: B
28. A cylindrical bar or steel with threads formed around it and
grooves or flutes
running lengthwise in it, intersecting with the threads to form
cutting edges, it is
used to cut internal threads.
A. Groove B. Lap
C. Tap D. Flute
Answer: C
29. A kind of bolt, which has no head but instead has threads on
bolts ends.
A. Stud Bolt B. Acme Threaded Bolt
C. Square Bolt D. Hex Bolt
Answer: A
30. Refers to the diameter of the imaginary cylinder that bounds
the crest of an
external thread.
A. Mean diameter B. Stress diameter
C. Minor diameter D. Major diameter
Answer: D
31. A pantograph is a mechanism having:
A. Lower pairs B. Rolling pairs
C. Spherical pairs D. Higher pairs
Answer: A
32. Which of the following describes the “slip” in belt drive?
 67

A. Loss in power
B. Difference between the angular velocities of two pulleys
C. Difference between linear speed of the rim
D. Difference between the linear speed of the rim of pulley
and the belt on it
Answer: D
33. Which of the following is the orientation of the axes of the two
shafts in cross
helical worm?
A. Parallel B. Non-parallel
C. Intersecting D. Non-parallel and non-
intersecting
Answer: D
34. In case of gears, the addendum is given by:
A. One module B. 2.16 x module
C. 1.57 x module D. 1.25 / module
Answer: A
35. How do you call a cam where in the follower reciprocates or
oscillates in a plane
parallel to its axis?
A. Circular cam B. Reciprocating cam
C. Cylindrical cam D. Oscillating cam
Answer: C
36. How are gears for watches generally manufactured?
A. Die casting B. Machining on hobber

C. Power metallurgy process D. Stamping

Answer: D
37. Rope brake dynamometer uses what?
A. Oil as lubricant B. No lubricant
C. Grease as lubricant D. Water as lubricant
Answer: B
38. Which of the following could be the effect of cold working?
A. Increases the fatigue strength C. Has no influence on
fatigue strength
B. Decreases the fatigue strength D. None of these
 68

Answer: A
39. In testing a material for endurance strength, it is subjected to:
A. Completely reversed load B. Static load
C. Impact load D. Dynamic load
Answer: A
40. Coaxing is the procedure o0f increasing:
A. Metal strength
B. Metal hardness by surface treatment
C. Metal resistance to corrosion by coating
D. Fatigue limit by overstressing the metal by successively
increasing loadings
Answer: D
41. The distance in inches a screw thread advances axially in one
turn.
A. Lead B. Circular pitch
C. Pitch D. Mean pitch
Answer: C
42. Which of the following type of threads recommended for
general use?
A. UNC B. UNEF
C. UNF D. NC
Answer: A
43. It is frequently used in automotive and aircraft work.
A. UNC B. UNEF
C. UNF D. NC
Answer: C
44. Which of the following type of threads are useful in
aeronautical equipments?
A. UNC B. UNEF
C. UNF D. NC
Answer: B
45. It is used on bolts for high-pressure flanges, cylinder head
studs etc.
A. UNC B. UNEF
C. UNF D. UN
Answer: D
 69

46. Refers to a screw fastening with a nut on it.

A. Bolt B. Fastener
C. Rivet D. None of these
Answer: A
47. Which one that has no nut and turns into a threaded hole?
A. Rivet B. Screw
C. Stud bolt D. U-bolt
Answer: B
48. Refers to an old name for an unfinished through bolt, comes
with a square.
A. Coupling bolt B. Machine bolt
C. Stud bolt D. Automobile bolt
Answer: B
49. Which type of bolt that finished all over, usually having coarse
threads?
A. Coupling bolt B. Machine bolt
C. Stud bolt D. Automobile bolt
Answer: A
50. A type of bolt distinguished by a short portion of the shank
underneath the head being square or finned or ribbed.
A. Carriage bolt B. Coupling bolt
C. Machine bolt D. Stud bolt
Answer: D
51. Up to what percent thickness of plate, edge preparation for
welding is not
needed?
A. 2 mm B. 4 mm
C. 8 mm D. 12 mm
Answer: B
52. Arc blow takes place in:
A. Gas welding
B. Arc welding when straight polarity is used
C. Arc welding when reversed polarity is used
D. Welding stainless steel
Answer: D
53. What is the function clutch in the machine tool?
 70

A. Alignment of drive
B. Lowering of drive
C. To insure that two shafts line up at high speed
D. To connect shaft will rotate with the driving shaft and to
disconnect them
at all
Answer: D
54. The height of tooth above the pitch circle or the radial distance
between pitch
circle and top land of the tooth.
A. Addendum B. Dedendum
C. Top root D. Top land
Answer: A
55. How do you call the distance of the tooth which is equal to the
sum of the addendum and dedendum?
A. Full depth B. Working depth
C. Whole depth D. Pitch
Answer: C
56. Which of the following stresses that is independent of loads?
A. Shear stress B. Residual stress
C. Design stress D. Yield stress
Answer: B
57. Which of the following is not used to resemble the shape of
tool bit?
A. Thread cutting B. Center cutting
C. Square nose D. Round nose
Answer: B
58. What is the recommended best cutting angle of drill for work
on steel or cast iron?
A. 39 degrees B. 49 degrees
C. 59 degrees D. 29 degrees
Answer: C
59. Copper and most of its alloys can be hardened by which of the
following?
A. Cold working B. Soaking
C. Patenting D. Case hardening
 71

Answer: A
60. Types of V-belts to use in a driving pulley with speed of 360
rpm and transmitting 5
Hp.
A. Type A belts B. Type B belts
C. Type C belts D. Type D belts
Answer: B
61. It is a type of bolt threaded on both ends that can be used
where a through bolt is
impossible.
A. Carriage bolt B. Coupling bolt
C. Machine bolt D. Stud bolt
Answer: A
62. A cheap variety of bolt was made in small sizes.
A. Stud bolt B. Carriage bolt
C. Stove bolt D. Mini bolt
Answer: C
63. A large wood screw is used to fasten machinery and
equipment to a wooden base.
A. Lag screw B. Log screw
C. Wood screw D. None of these
Answer: A
64. The length of contact in a tapped hole should be a minimum of
about ______ for
cast iron.
A. D B. 1.5D
C. 1.2D D. 2D
Answer: B
65. When the location of bolt is such that it would normally be
shear, it is better
practice to use a:
A. Dummy bolts B. Mid-pins
C. Crank pins D. Dowel pins
Answer: D
66. A locking device used to maintain pressure between the
threads of the bolt and
 72

nut.
A. Gasket B. Lock nuts
C. Lock washer D. Lock out
Answer: C
67. The crest diameter of a screw thread is the same as:
A. Major diameter B. Pitch diameter
C. Minor diameter D. None of these
Answer: A
68. Turn buckle has:
A. Left hand threads on both ends
B. Left hand threads on one end and right hand threads on
other end
C. Right hand threads on both ends
D. No threads
Answer: B
69. The diameter of a washer is generally:
A. Equal to the diameter of bolt
B. Slightly more than the diameter of the bolt
C. Slightly less than the diameter of the bolt
D. Of any size that suits the application
Answer: A
70. The stress concentration is maximum at ______ in a standard
coarse thread.
A. All over the surface B. Flank
C. Root D. Top surface
Answer: C
71. Which of the following is not an angle measuring device?
A. Bevel protector B. Sine bar
C. Combination square D. Angle iron
Answer: D
72. The mould for casting ferrous materials in continuous casting
process is made of
what material?
A. Copper B. Medium carbon steel
C. High carbon steel D. Low carbon steel
Answer: A
 73

73. Clutch slippage while clutch is engaged is especially

noticeable.
A. During idling B. A low speed
C. During acceleration D. During braking
Answer: C
74. In general, to engage securely and prevent dragging, what is
the clearance
between release bearing and release collar in the clutch?
A. 2 – 3 mm B. 4 – 5 mm
C. 6 – 7 mm D. 8 – 9 mm
Answer: A
75. Poison compression rings are made of what material?
A. Steel B. Bronze
C. Aluminum D. Cast iron
Answer: D
76. What is the usual value of helix angle of a drill?
A. 120 degrees B. 110 degrees
C. 60 degrees D. 30 degrees
Answer: D
77. What is meant by drossing?
A. A method of cleaning the casting
B. A method of deoxidation of molten material
C. An inspection method for castings
D. The deformation of oxides on the molten metal surface
Answer: D
78. If the first digit in AISI and SAE designations is one (1), then, it
indicates what?
A. Carbon steels B. Nickel steels
C. Molybdenum steels D. Chromium steels
Answer: A
79. Which of the following where the gear tooth vernier is used to
measure?
A. Module C. Gear tooth thickness of gear
tooth
B. Gear tooth profile D. Pitch line thickness of gear
tooth
 74

Answer: B
80. A cold chisel is made of what?
A. Mild steel B. German silver
C. High carbon steel D. Cast iron
Answer: C
81. Elastic nut is a locking device that has:
A. One small nut is tightened over main nut and main
tightened against
smaller one loosening, creating friction jamming
B. A slot is cut partly in middle of nut partly in middle of
tightening of screw
C. Hard fiber or nylon cotter is recessed in the nut and
becomes threaded as
the nut is screwed on the bolt causing a tight grip
D. Through slots are made at top and a cotter pin is passed
through these and
a hole in the bolt and cotter pin spitted and bent in
reverse direction at
other end
Answer: C
82. Foundation bolts of specified size should be used and
surrounded by a pip sleeve
with an inside diameter of at least _____ times the diameter
of the anchor bolt.
A. 1 B. 2
C. 3 D. 4
Answer: C
83. Foundation bolts should be at least ______ times the diameter
of the anchor bolt.
A. 12 B. 14
C. 16 D. 18
Answer: D
84. No foundation bolts shall be less than _____ mm diameter.
A. 10 B. 12
C. 14 D. 16
Answer: B
 75

85. Anchor bolts should be embedded in concrete at least ____

times the bolt
diameter.
A. 10 B. 20
C. 30 D. 40
Answer: C
86. The screw thread commonly used for transmission of motion is
one of the
following types of _____ threads.
A. Acme B. Vee
C. Knuckle D. British Association
Answer: A
87. The spindle of bench vises is usually provided with:
A. Buttress threads B. Square threads
C. Acme threads D. V-threads
Answer: C
88. Any device used to connect or joint more components.
A. Bolt B. Screw
C. Fastener D. None of these
Answer: C
89. When the threads are of opposite hand, the driven screw
moves rapidly is known
as:
A. Bearing screw B. Compound screw

C. Differential screw D. Set screw

Answer: B
90. The thread length is about _____ times the diameters.
A. 1.25 B. 1.5
C. 1.8 D. 2.0
Answer: B
91. It is the ability of a material to absorb energy when deformed
elastically and to
return it when unloaded.
A. Creep B. Fatigue strength
C. Resilience D. Toughness
 76

Answer: C
92. Which of the following cams where the follower reciprocates or
oscillates in a
plane parallel to the axis of rotation?
A. Cam curves B. Radial cam
C. Cylindrical cam D. Tangential cam
Answer: C
93. Which of the following cams where the follower reciprocates or
oscillates in a
plane perpendicular to its axis of rotation?
A. Tangential cam B. Cam curves
C. Radial cam D. Cylindrical cam
Answer: C
94. During tensile test, which of the following stress-strain curve(s)
fits for a glass rod?
A. A straight line B. A parabola
C. An irregular curve D. A sudden break
Answer: D
95. In case of a knuckle joint, the pin is most likely to fail in:
A. Shear B. Tension
C. Compression D. Double shear
Answer: D
96. A single ply leather belt running at a belt velocity of 300 ft/min
is likely to transmit
per inch of width.
A. 2.5 Hp B. 3.0 Hp
C. 4.0 Hp D. 5.0 Hp
Answer: C
97. At what temperature range where ferromagnetic alpha iron
exists?
A. below 7230C B. 700 – 9100C
C. 1000 – 1440 C 0 D. Above 15390C
Answer: A
98. How do you call a body having identical properties all over?
A. Heterogeneous B. Homogeneous
C. Elastic D. Ductile
 77

Answer: B
99. How is the material described if it recovers its original
dimensions when the load is
removed.
A. Elastic B. Plastic
C. Brittle D. Malleable
Answer: A
100. What is the percentage of carbon in Eutectoid steel?
A. 0.02% B. 0.30%
C. 0.63% D. 0.80%
Answer: D

ELEMENTS 6
 78

1. Safety features that must be placed and maintained at machine,

blacksmith,
welding and foundry shop is called:
A. Safety Goggle B. Walkway Guide
C. Safety Notices in Markings D. All of these
Answer: C
2. Test sometimes referred to as upsetting test called:
A. Bend B. Flaring
C. Flange D. Crush
Answer: A
3. It is a machine used for the testing of very thin steel or surface
layers.
A. Charpy Test B. Isod Test
C. Description Test D. Rockwell Test
Answer: D
4. ______ is a test for pipe used for coiling in sizes 2 inches.
A. Flaring B. Crush
C. Flange D. Bend
Answer: D
5. Imparts of reciprocating motion to a single point cutting tool
called:
A. Dividing Head B. Slotting Attachment
C. Circular Pitch D. Circular Milling
Attachment
Answer: B
6. Milling machine accessories are used to hold milling cutter in
the milling machine
called:
A. Spindle – Nose Tooling B. Milling Machine Size
C. Vertical Nilling Attachment D. Milling Machine Arbors
Answer: D
7. An important accessory of milling machine.
A. Milling Machine Vise B. Cutters
C. Ram D. Vertical Milling
Attachment
 79

Answer: B
8. A machine used in testing steel generally strikes the specimen
with an energy from
220 to 265 ft-lb.
A. Izod Test B. Charpy Test
C. Rockwell Test D. Test Blocks
Answer: B
9. The area of the machine shop whose metal is being melted to
form a new shape is
the:
A. Foundry Area B. Tool and Die Area

C. Welding Area D. Mass Production Area

Answer: A
10. Which of the following is not the work of a machinist?
A. Reboring B. Overhauling
C. Grinding D. Boring
Answer: B
11. The presence of sulphur in pig iron makes:
A. The casting unsound B. It brittle
C. It hard D. It is easy machinable
Answer: A
12. What is the effect of alloying zinc to copper?
A. Increases hardness
B. Impart free-machining properties
C. Improve hardness and strength
D. Increases strength and ductility (if added up to 10 –
30%)
Answer: D
13. The imperfection in the crystal structure of metal is:
A. Impurity B. Fracture slip
C. Slip D. Dislocation
Answer: D
14. When is the pressure release in resistance welding?
A. After the weld cools C. After completion of
current
 80

B. During heating period D. Just at the time of

passing the current
Answer: A
15. It is the thickness of sheet to the spot welded, then electrode
tip diameter is equal
to _____.
A. t2 B. 2 sq rt. of t
C. sq. rt. of t D. 1.5 sq. rt. of t
Answer: B
16. A twist drill is specified by which of the following?
A. Its shank and diameter C. Its diameter and lip
angle
B. Shank, material and flute size D. Shank, material and
diameter
Answer: D
17. Which of the following is used to measure the clearance
between the value and
tappet of an automobile engine?
A. Shape gauge B. Slip gauge
C. Feeler gauge D. Vernier scale
Answer: C
18. Speedometer drive is generally taken from:
A. Gear box B. Fan belt
C. Flywheel D. Frontwheel
Answer: D
19. What is the usual percentage of cut on the return stroke of
hacksaw blade?
A. 0 B. 5
C. 7 D. 9
Answer: A
20. Which of the following will best describe sunk key?
A. The key is helical along shaft B. The keyway is cut in
shaft only
C. The keyway is cut in hub only D. The key is cut in both
shaft and hub
Answer: D
 81

21. The machine, which can flatter surface on horizontal, vertical

or angular plane.
A. Drilling Machine B. Shaper Machine
C. Power Saw D. Lathe Machine
Answer: B
22. Which of the following is not a part of a lathe machine?
A. Fan B. Carriage
C. Headstock D. Tail Stock
Answer: A
23. One important skills that operates of machine tools must have
an understanding of
measurements, which demands:
A. Speed B. Precision
C. Sociability D. Neatness
Answer: B
24. Which tool does not belong to the group?
A. Vice Grip B. Feeler Gage
C. Torque Wrench D. Adjustable Wrench
Answer: B
25. A machinery operation whereby the tool rotates while the feed
is stationary.
A. Shaping B. Milling
C. Turning D. Reaming
Answer: B
26. Which of the following is not a part of the headstock?
A. Anvil B. Spindle
C. Motor D. Back Pressure
Answer: A
27. A machining operation whereby the tool reciprocates and the
feed is stationary.
A. Planing B. Shaping
C. Turning D. Reaming
Answer: B
28. ______ is the kind of center, which is being attached and
meshed to the tailstock
spindle, which is also static while the work is rotating.
 82

A. Dead Center B. Live Center

C. Focal Center D. Work Center
Answer: A
29. A machine used in shaping metal by means of an abrasive
wheel of the removal of
metals with an abrasive is called:
A. Planer Machine B. Power Saw
C. Shaper Machine D. Grinding Machine
Answer: D
30. A machine tool in which an abrasive wheel is used as a cutting
tool to obtain a very
smooth finish.
A. Broaching Machine B. Planer
C. Tool Grinder D. Milling Machine
Answer: C
31. Which of the following where turn buckle has?
A. Left hand threads on one end and right hand threads on
other end
B. Right hand threads on both ends
C. Left hand threads on both ends
D. No threads
Answer: A
32. Which of the following is the best process for butt welding of
two plates each of
which is 25 mm thick?
A. Electro slag welding B. Gas welding
C. Submerged arc welding D. Steam welding
Answer: A
33. Which of the following statement(s) is correct for an oilness
bearing?
A. The oil film is maintained by supplying oil under pressure
B. The oil film pressure is produced only by rotation of the
journal
C. Do not need external supply of lubricant
D. Grease is needed to be applied after some intervals
Answer: C
 83

34. The working load P for a chain for crane applications is

expressed in terms of
diameter of link “d” in cm follows.
A. P = 1.5d2 B. P = 25d2
C. P = 50d2 D. P = 500d2
Answer: D
35. The column splice is used for increasing:
A. Cross-sectional area of the column C. Strength of the
column
B. Length of the column D. All of these
Answer: B
36. At what temperature that Gamma iron exist?
A. Between 9100C and 14000C C. Near melting point
B. Between 14000C and 15390C D. Room temperature
Answer: A
37. The behavior of metals where in strength of a metal is
increased and the ductility
is decreased on heating a relatively low temperature after
cold working is called:
A. Clustering B. Twinning
C. Screw dislocation D. Strain aging
Answer: D
38. Which of the following statement(s) is correct in “carbon steel
castings”?
A. The percentage carbon is less than 1.7%
B. The percentage carbon is between 1.7% to 2%
C. The percentage for alloying elements is controlled
D. None of the above
Answer: A
39. Aluminum alloys for pressure die casting.
A. Must not be free from hot shortness
B. Must have iron as one of the constituents
C. Must not posses considerable fluidity
D. Must be light
Answer: C
 84

40. Which of the following is maximum in 18 – 4 – 1 high speed

steel?
A. Tungsten B. Chromium
C. Argon D. Iron
Answer: D
41. A machine tool used principally to machine flat or plane
surfaces with a single
pointed tool
A. Shaper B. Planer
C. Drill D. Power Saw
Answer: A
42. A tool with hardened steel points used for scribing or laying of
distances.
A. Plain Scriber B. Divider
C. Trammel D. Hermaphrodite
Answer: B
43. _____ used to machine flat or curved surfaces with a tool,
which moves in a
reciprocating motion.
A. Planer B. Shaper
C. Grinder D. Lathe
Answer: B
44. _____ used in the production of flat surfaces on pieces too
large or too heavy to
hold in a shaper.
A. Planer B. Shaper
C. Grinder D. Shaver
Answer: A
45. A machine tool used to produce a variety of surfaces by using
a circular type cutter
with multiple teeth called:
A. Lathe Machine B. Milling Machine
C. Broaching Machine D. Grinding
Answer: B
46. A cutting tool used to finish internal and external surfaces by
the use of a cutter
 85

called a broach, which has a series of cutting edges of teeth.

A. Lathe Machine B. Broaching Machine

C. Planer D. Shaper
Answer: B
47. The method of cold working by compression.
A. Broaching B. Lapping
C. Piercing D. Reaming
Answer: C
48. A group of thin steel strips used for measuring clearances.
A. Feeler Gage B. Tachometer
C. Micrometer D. Caliper
Answer: A
49. The process of working metals by the application of sudden
blows or by a steady
pressured called:
A. Rolling B. Forging
C. Casting D. Turning
Answer: B
50. A kind of chuck, which should not be used where accuracy is
required called:
A. Collet Chuck B. Magnetic Chuck
C. Four Jaw Chuck D. Universal Chuck
Answer: D
51. Super conductors:
A. Exist at temperature below 10K C. Are non-
metallic substances
B. Are the dense metals without voids D. Are the purest
forms of metals
Answer: A
52. When large number of components are turned and parted off
from a bar, the
chuck generally used is:
A. Two jaw chuck B. Four jaw chuck
C. Collet chuck D. Magnetic chuck
Answer: D
 86

53. Cutting speed for some materials are as under, which one of
the following could be
cutting speed for brass?
A. 30 m/min B. 40 m/min
C. 80 m/min D. 50 m/min
Answer: B
54. If V is the volume of metal in casting and A is its surface area,
then the time of
solidification will be proportional to:
A. V2 , 1/A B. 1/V2 , A2
C. V , 1/A2 D. V2 , 1/A2
Answer: D
55. The draft allowance on metallic pattern as compared to
wooden ones is:
A. More B. Same
C. Less D. More or less
depending on size
Answer: C
56. Arc metal patterns are used for:
A. Precision castings B. Small castings
C. Large castings D. Large scale production
of castings
Answer: D
57. What tool is used in foundry for repairing the mould?
A. Swab B. Gagger
C. Bellows D. Rammer
Answer: A
58. What tool is used in foundry for smoothening and cleaning out
depression in the
mould?
A. Swab B. Gagger
C. Bellows D. Rammer
Answer: C
59. Which of the following does not have to be lubricated when
drilling?
A. Brass B. Steel
 87

C. Monel D. Mild steel

Answer: A
60. The tool used in precision work to smooth or enlarge holes is
called a:
A. Round out B. Drift pin
C. Reamer D. Protractor
Answer: C
61. A kind of chuck, which has reversible jaws, which could be,
adjustable separately
called:
A. Collet Chuck B. Independent Chuck

C. Four Jaw Chuck D. Magnetic Chuck

Answer: B
62. A tool which when pressed into a finished hole in a piece of
work , provides
centers on which the piece may be turned or otherwise
machines called:
A. Mash B. Butt
C. Mandrel D. Wobble
Answer: C
63. A machine tool, which is very similar to a shaper except that,
the ram reciprocates
vertically rather than horizontally.
A. Lathe B. Grinder
C. Planer D. Slotter
Answer: D
64. A cylindrical bar of steel with threads formed around it and
grooves or flutes
running lengthwise in it, intersecting with the threads to form
cutting edges. It is
used to cut internal threads.
A. Groove B. Lap
C. Tap D. Flute
Answer: C
 88

65. A mechanism, which usually do the indexing in a machine tool

called:
A. Slotter B. Chuck
C. Dividing Head D. Indexer
Answer: C
66. The operation of machining the end of a work piece to make
the end square with
the axis.
A. Squaring B. Buffing
C. Lapping D. Honing
Answer: A
67. The operation of enlarging a hole by means of an adjustable
cutting tool with only
one cutting edge.
A. Drlling B. Broaching
C. Milling D. Boring
Answer: D
68. The operation of making a cone-shaped enlargement of the
end of a hole, as for a
recess for a flat head screw.
A. Counter Sinking B. Knurling
C. Squaring D. Performing
Answer: A
69. It is an operation of sizing and finishing a hole by means of a
cutting tool having
several cutting edges.
A. Notching B. Piercing
C. Turning D. Reaming
Answer: D
70. The hop term used to include the marking or inscribing of
center points circles
area or straight lines upon metal surfaces, either curve or flat,
for the guidance of
the worker called:
A. Shaping B. Hobbing
C. Laying Out D. Shaping
 89

Answer: C
71. When measuring a drill for size, measure across the:
A. Margins B. Flutes
C. Shank D. Point
Answer: A
72. How do you call the tool used for cleaning files?
A. File cleaner B. File card
C. File oilstone D. Scrapper
Answer: B
73. The melting point of Babbitt is approximately:
A. 10000F B. 6500F
C. 750 F0 D. 5000F
Answer: B
74. How is tubing measured?
A. Inside diameter B. Outside diameter
C. Thickness of wall D. Wire gage
Answer: B
75. Which of the following metals will respond to heat treatment?
A. Cast iron B. Wrought iron
C. Medium carbon steel D. Low carbon steel
Answer: C
76. The ability of metal to withstand loads without breaking down
is:
A. Stress B. Strength
C. Strain D. Elasticity
Answer: B
77. Which of the following metals is non-magnetic?
A. Cast iron B. Alloy steel
C. Cast steel D. Manganese steel
Answer: D
78. A machining operation whereby the tool reciprocates and the
feed is stationary.
A. Planing B. Shaping
C. Turning D. Reaming
Answer: B
 90

79. Which of the following is not a tap used for cutting threads in
holes?
A. Tapping tap B. Plug tap
C. Taper tap D. Bottoming tap
Answer: A
80. Herring bone gears are gears which:
A. Do not operate on parallel shafts
B. Have a line contact between the teeth
C. Consists of two left handed helical gears
D. Tend to produce thrust on the shafts
Answer: B
81. It is used to true and align machine tools fixtures and works to
test and inspect size
trueness of finished work, and to compare measurements
either heights or depths
or many other measurements.
A. Dial Gage B. Dial Indicator
C. Tachometer D. Speedometer
Answer: B
82. A tool used for measuring diameters.
A. Caliper B. Manometer
C. Tachometer D. Pyrometer
Answer: A
83. The process of forming metals by the use of dies after the
metal is heated to its
plastic range.
A. Rolling B. Froging
C. Turning D. Casting
Answer: A
84. A machine tool used to out metal parts a lift, medium and large
section using a reciprocating hacksaw blade.
A. Tool Grinder B. Shaper
C. Planer D. Power Saw
Answer: D
85. A cold chisel is made of:
A. Cast Iron B. German Silver
 91

C. High Carbon Steel D. High Speed Steel

Answer: C
86. Trimming is a process associated with:
A. Electroplating B. Forging
C. Machining of Metals D. Press Work
Answer: B
87. Foundry crucible is made of:
A. Graphite B. German Silver
C. Lead D. Mild Steel
Answer: A
88. Formed milling operation of cutting gears can be used for
cutting which type of
gears?
A. Spur B. Worm
C. All of the above D. Bevel
Answer: C
89. Select the one that is gear finishing process.
A. Gear Shaving B. Gear Shaping
C. Gear Hobbing D. Gear Milling
Answer: A’
90. Broaching operation is generally used in automobile industry
as:
A. It is a mass production machine
B. It is an automatic machine
C. Operation is completed in one stroke
D. Semi-skilled operators can be employed
Answer: D
91. Which of the following statements is true for the internal
stresses existing in a
welded connection?
A. Internal stresses are not relieved by heat treatment
B. Internal stresses are not relieved when weld is peened
C. Internal stresses may be relieved when weld is peened
D. Internal stresses are relieved by x-ray analysis
Answer: B
 92

92. Stainless steel is obtained principally by the use of which of

the alloying elements?
A. Chromium B. Nickel
C. Carbon D. Tungsten
Answer: A
93. Galvanized iron is a term referring to iron coated with:
A. Tin B. Zinc
C. Magnesium D. Aluminum
Answer: B
94. Which of the following is not a common term relating to the
classification of fits?
A. Tunking B. Snug
C. Medium force fit D. Bound
Answer: D
95. In usual spur gearing, which of the following statement(s) is
correct?
A. Pitch circle and base circle are the same
B. Working depth includes the clearance
C. Tooth outlines are usually involute curves
D. Tooth outlines are usually cycloidal curves
Answer: C
96. In general, the design stress and factor of safety are related as
follows:
A. Design stress = ultimate stress times factor of safety
B. Design stress = ultimate stress divided by factor of
safety
C. Factor of safety = design stress by ultimate stress
D. Ultimate stress = factor of safety divided by design
stress
Answer: B
97. In usual spur gearing, the:
A. Pitch circle and base circle are the same
B. Working depth includes clearance
C. Tooth outline are always cycloidal curves
D. Tooth outlines are usually involute curves
Answer: D
 93

98. Which of the following is not the other name of circumferential

stress for thin
walled cylinders?
A. Hoop stress B. Girth stress
C. Tangential stress D. Longitudinal stress
Answer: D
99. How do you call the ratio of the volumetric stress to volumetric
strain?
A. Modulus in shear B. Stress to strain ratio
C. Volumetric ratio D. Bulk modulus
Answer: D
100. Hearing bone gears are gears which:
A. Do not operate parallel shafts
B. Have a line contact between the teeth
C. Tend to produce and thrust on the shafts
D. Consists of two left handed helical gears
Answer: B

ELEMENTS 7
 94

1. Extra flexible hoisting rope applications is:

A. 6 x 27 B. 6 x 37
C. 6 x 9 D. 6 x 21
Answer: B
2. All terms and abbreviations deal with wire rope arrangement
except this ______
which deals with wire rope materials strength.
A. Performed B. IWRC
C. Mps D. Lang Lay
Answer: C
3. One of the following materials is not mentioned for wire rope
pulley / sheave
applications.
A. Plastic B. Iron
C. Paper D. Copper Alloy
Answer: A
4. The factor of safety generally applied in wire rope design starts
at 3-4 for standing
rope application, 5-12 for operating rope and _______ for
hazard to life and
properly application like foundry operation.
A. Higher Value B. 7 – 10
C. 8 – 10 D. 10 – 18
Answer: A
5. In the selection of wire rope, regular lay means wires and
standards are arranged in
the following manner.
A. Twisted in same direction B. Twisted in any
direction
C. Twisted in opposite direction D. Twisted in along
direction
Answer: C
6. A process of prestressing a hollow cylindrical member beyond
the elastic range by
hydraulic pressure.
 95

A. Presstage B. Stress relieving

C. Auto frottage D. Countersinking
Answer: C
7. When two touching surfaces have a high contact pressure and
when these surfaces
have minute relative motion a phenomenon called:
A. Carving B. Friction
C. Fretting D. Prestressing
Answer: C
8. Pipes subject to high pressures are generally made by:
A. Slush casting B. Pressure casting
C. Extrusion D. Centrifugal casting
Answer: D
9. Hoop stress refers to:
A. Circumferential tensile stress B. Compressive stress
C. Longitudinal stress D. Radial stress
Answer: A
10. Autofrettage is the method of:
A. Calculating stress in thick cylinders
B. Increasing life of thick cylinders
C. Prestressing thick cylinders
D. Relieving thick cylinders
Answer: C
11. A machine tool in which an abrasive wheel is used as a cutting
tool to obtain a very
smooth finish.
A. Planer B. Shaper
C. Power saw D. Grinder
Answer: D
12. It is used to produce a variety of surfaces by using a circular
type cutter with
multiple teeth.
A. Milling machine B. Broaching machine
C. Breading machine D. Hemming machine
Answer: A
 96

13. A heavy rotating body which serves as reservoir for absorbing

and redistributing
kinetic energy.
A. Shaft B. Governor
C. Flywheel D. Puncher
Answer: C
14. A kind of gear used for heavy duty works where a large ratio of
speed is required
and is extensively used in speed reducers.
A. Helical gear B. Worm gear
C. Bevel gear D. Spiral gear
Answer: B
15. A kind of gear used transmits motion from one shaft to another
shaft at angle to
the first.
A. Helical gear B. Worm gear
C. Bevel gear D. Spiral gear
Answer: C
16. The minimum thickness of steel members exposed to weather
and accessible for
painting is:
A. 6 mm B. 8 mm
C. 4 mm D. 10 mm
Answer: D
17. The common deoxidizer and cleanser of steel, forming oxides
and sulfates, that are
carried off in the slag.
A. Manganese B. Carbon
C. Tungsten D. Sulfur
Answer: A
18. A highly transparent and exceedingly hard crystalline stone of
almost pure carbon.
A. Gold B. Diamond
C. Bronze D. Crystalline
Answer: B
19. A fine grained, salty silica rock used for sharpening edge tools.
 97

A. Eutectoid B. Austenite
C. Oilstone D. Pearlite
Answer: C
20. An amorphous solid made by fusing silica with a basic oxide.
A. Pearlite B. Rock
C. Silicon D. Glass
Answer: D
21. The radial pressure and hoop tension for a thick cylinder is:
A. Maximum at inner surface and decreases toward outer
surface
B. Minimum at inner surface and increases towards outer
surface
C. Minimum at inner and outer surfaces and maximum in
middle
D. Maximum at inner and outer surfaces and minimum in
middle
Answer: A
22. Assuming longitudinal strain to be constant at any point in the
thickness of the
cylinder, the radial stress Sr and hoop stress Sh are related
as:
A. Sr–Sh = constant B. Sr+Sh = constant
C. Sr/Sh = constant D. Sr-Sh/Sr = constant
Answer: A
23. Their cylindrical shell of diameter d and thickness t when
subjected to internal
pressure P, if Poisson’s ratio of material is µ, the
circumferential or hoop strain is:
A. Pd(1-2µ)/2tE B. Pd(1-2µ)/4tE

C. Pd(1/2-µ)/2tE D. Pd(1/2-µ)/4tE
Answer: A
24. A cylinder in which the ratio of the wall thickness to the inside
diameter is ______
may be called a thin cylinder.
A. Less than 0.05 B. Less than 0.07
 98

C. More than 0.05 D. More than 0.07

Answer: B
25. External pressure tubes are designed with an apparent factor
of safety of:
A. 1 to 3 B. 4 to 6
C. 5 to 7 D. 8 to 10
Answer: D
26. Refers to a hollow of round or any other cross-section having
a continuous
periphery.
A. Gear B. Flywheel
C. Sphere D. Tube
Answer: D
27. The thickness should be multiplied by ____ to obtain the
nominal wall thickness.
A. 5/8 B. 8/5
C. 7/8 D. 8/7
Answer: D
28. It is used in high-pressure cylinders.
A. Thin-walled cylinders B. Thick-walled cylinders
C. Solid-walled cylinders D. Hard-walled
cylinders
Answer: B
29. To obtain safe working pressures the critical pressure, should
be at least _____
times the working pressure.
A. 3 B.4
C. 5 D. 6
Answer: C
30. The radial pressure between the cylinders at the surface of
contact depends on the
_____ of the materials.
A. Strength B. Hardness
C. Modulus of elasticity D. Modulus of rigidity
Answer: C
 99

31. A soft yellow metal, known since ancient times a precious

metal which all material
values are based.
A. Solidus B. Bonze
C. Gold D. Austenite
Answer: C
32. The operation of cooling a heated piece of work rapidly by
dropping it in water,
brine or oil.
A. Normalizing B. Quenching
C. Annealing D. Squeezing
Answer: B
33. A device used to prevent leakage of media.
A. Seal B. Packings
C. Teflon D. Graphite
Answer: A
34. A welding operation in which a non-ferrous filler metal melts
at a temperature
below that of the metal joined but is heated above 450 0C.
A. Arc welding B. Brazing
C. Spot welding D. Butt welding
Answer: B
35. The process of working metals by the application of sudden
blows or by a steady
pressure.
A. Trimming B. Welding
C. Forging D. Lancing
Answer: C
36. The process of producing a variety of surfaces by using a
circular type cutter with
multiple teeth.
A. Piercing B. Cutting
C. Embossing D. Milling
Answer: D
37. The softening of metals by heat treatment and most commonly
consists of heating
 100

the metals up to near molten state and then cooling them very
slowly.
A. Quenching B. Tempering
C. Annealing D. Forming
Answer: C
38. The maximum stress induced in a material when subjected to
alternating or
repeated loading without causing failure.
A. Elastic limit B. Proportional limit
C. Rupture strength D. Endurance limit
Answer: D
39. The total deformation measured in the direction of the line of
stress.
A. Axial deformation B. Elongation
C. Strain D. Unit stress
Answer: C
40. The maximum stress to which a material can be subjected
without a trace of any
permanent set remaining upon a complete withdrawal of the
stress.
A. Ultimate limit B. Proportional limit
C. Endurance limit D. Elastic limit
Answer: D
41. In cross or regular lay ropes, the:
A. Direction of twist in strands is opposite to the direction of
twist of strands
B. Direction of twist of wires and strands are the same
C. Wires in two adjacent strands are twisted in opposite
direction D. Wires are not twisted
Answer: A
42. Which of the ropes will be most flexible?
A. 6 by 7 B. 6 by 19
C. 6 by 37 D. 8 by 19
Answer: C
43. A wire rope that the wires and strands are twisted in opposite
direction.
 101

A. Long lay B. Lang lay

C. Regular lay D. Performed
Answer: C
44. A wire rope that the wires and strands are twisted in the same
direction.
A. Lon lay B. Lang lay
C. Performed D. Non-performed
Answer: B
45. A type of rope used for haulages, rigging and guardrails.
A. 6 x 35 IWRC B. 6 x 25 IWRC
C. 7 x 7 IWRC D. 6 x 8 IWRC
Answer: C
46. A rope used for general-purpose.
A. 6 x 15 IWRC B. 6 x 21 IWRC
C. 6 x 19 IWRC D. 7 x 26 IWRC
Answer: C
47. A type of rope used for lines, hawsers, overheated cranes,
hoists:
A. 6 x 34 IWRC B. 6 x 35 IWRC
C. 6 x 37IWRC D. 6 x 45 IWRC
Answer:
48. The regular materials for wire rope are made of:
A. Cast steel B. Chromium
C. Wrought iron D. High-carbon steel
Answer: D
49. The ultimate strength of improved Plow steel is in the range of:
A. 200 and 400 ksi B. 240 and 280 ksi
C. 230 and 260 ksi D. 400 and 500 ksi
Answer: B
50. The minimum suggested design factor of _____ for ropes
miscellaneous hoisting
equipment.
A. 2 B. 3
C. 4 D. 5
Answer: D
 102

51. The total permissible variation in the size of a dimension; the

difference between
the limits of the size.
A. Deformation B. Variance
C. Tolerance D. Allowance
Answer: C
52. Fluid film desired between two surfaces having relative sliding
motion.
A. Lube oil B. Lubrication
C. Graphite D. Grease
Answer: B
53. Flexible material used to seal pressurized fluids, normally
under dynamic
conditions.
A. Packings B. Teflon
C. Seals D. Safety shield
Answer: A
54. A total resistance that a material offers to an applied load.
A. Flexure B. Stress
C. Elasticity D. Rigidity
Answer: B
55. A property of material which relates the lateral strains to the
longitudinal strain.
A. Rigidity B. Elasticity
C. Poisson’s ratio D. Deflection
Answer: C
56. A kind of gear used for heavy duty works where a large ratio of
speed is required
and is extensively used in speed reducers.
A. Spiral gear B. Bevel gear
C. Worm gear D. Helical gear
Answer: C
57. A kind of gear used to transmit motion from one shaft to
another shaft at an angle
to the first.
A. Spiral gear B. Worm gear
 103

C. Helical gear D. Bevel gear

Answer: D
58. Which of the following is not a classification of iron ore?
A. Hematite B. Magnetite
C. Sulfurite D. Siderite
Answer: C
59. Which of the following metals will respond to heat treatment?
A. Cast iron B. Medium carbon steel
C. Wrought iron D. Low carbon steel
Answer: B
60. Which of the following is a non-magnetic?
A. Cast iron B. Alloy steel
C. Cast steel D. Manganese steel
Answer: D
61. To avoid excessive wear rate, the recommended limiting
pressure for 6 x 19 rope is
_____ fro cast iron.
A. 200 psi B. 300 psi
C. 400 psi D. 500 psi
Answer: D
62. To avoid excessive wear rate, the recommended limiting
pressure for 6 x 19 rope is
____ for cast steel.
A. 700 psi B. 900 psi
C. 1000 psi D. 1200 psi
Answer: B
63. To avoid excessive wear rate, the recommended limiting
pressure for 6 x 19 rope is
____ for manganese steel
A. 2000 psi B. 2300 psi
C. 2500 psi D. 3000 psi
Answer: C
64. Wire ropes are made from cold-drawn wires that are first
wrapped into:
A. Layer B. Segment
C. Strands D. None of these
 104

Answer: C
65. The designation 6 by 7 indicates that the rope is made of six
strands each
containing:
A. 7 pieces B. 7 diameters
C. 7 wires D. 7 strands
Answer: C
66. Ropes are made of:
A. Aluminum alloys B. Copper
C. Bronze D. All of these
Answer: D
67. The ratio of the strength of all the inside wires to the strength
of all the wires in
the rope is:
A. Excess strength B. Reserve strength
C. Factor of safety D. Ratio of factor
Answer: B
68. The chief usage of wire ropes at the present time is:
A. Elevators B. Cranes
C. Tramways D. All of these
Answer: D
69. Tests and theoretical investigations by J.F. Howe indicate that
for steel ropes of the
ordinary constructions the value of modulus of elasticity is:
A. 10,000,000 psi B. 10,500,000 psi
C. 11,000,000 psi D. 12,000,000 psi
Answer: D
70. Average mine-hoist practice is to use drums ____ times the
rope diameter.
A. 60 to 70 B. 60 to 80
C. 60 to 90 D. 60 to 100
Answer: D
71. The ability of metal to withstand loads without breaking down
is:
A. Stress B. Strength
C. Strain D. Elasticity
 105

Answer: B
72. A machining operation whereby the tool reciprocates and the
feed is stationary is
called:
A. Shaping B. Reaming
C. Planning D. Turning
Answer: A
73. Any material that retards the flow of electricity used to prevent
passage or escape
of electric current from conductors.
A. Insulators B. Bricks
C. Ceramics D. Refractories
Answer: A
74. A metallic element and the only metal that is liquid at ordinary
temperature.
A. Austenite B. Mercury
C. Manganese D. Martensite
Answer: B
75. An alloy of copper and zinc.
A. Aluminum B. Bronze
C. Brass D. Nickel
Answer: C
76. Usually a copper-tin alloy is:
A. Aluminum B. Nickel
C. Brass D. Bronze
Answer: D
77. A tool with hardened points used for scribing circles or laying
of distances.
A. Trammel B. Caliper
C. Divider D. Micrometer
Answer: C
78. Name of mechanism which a welding operator holds during
gas welding at the end
of which the gases are burned to perform the various gas
welding operations.
A. Mash B. Core
 106

C. Wobbie D. Torch
Answer: D
79. The maximum stress to which a material may be subjected
before failure occurs.
A. Rupture stress B. Yield stress
C. Ultimate stress D. Allowable stress
Answer: C
80. The maximum stress induced in a material when subjected to
alternate or
repeated loading without causing failure.
A. Yield point B. Ultimate point
C. Endurance limit D. Proportional limit
Answer: C
81. What is the recommended sheave diameter for haulage rope?
A. 70d B. 71d
C. 72d D. 73d
Answer: C
82. What is the recommended sheave diameter for standard
hoisting rope?
A. 40d B. 45d
C. 50d D. 55d
Answer: B
83. What is the recommended sheave diameter for extra-flexible
hoisting rope?
A. 30d B. 31d
C. 32d D. 33d
Answer: B
84. Wire ropes are made from cold-drawn wires that are first
wrapped into:
A. Pulp B. Strands
C. Helices D. Hemp
Answer: B
85. The Roebling Handbook suggests minimum design factor of
guy’s is:
A. 3.0 B. 3.5
C. 4.0 D. 5.0
 107

Answer: B
86. The Roebling Handbook suggests minimum design factor of
miscellaneous hoisting
equipment is:
A. 3.0 B. 5.0
C. 7.0 D. 9.0
Answer: B
87. An extra flexible rope is:
A. 6 x 7 B. 6 x 19
C. 6 x 37 D. 7 x 7
Answer: C
88. The strength of the rope is always ____ the sum of the
strengths of wires.
A. Less than B. More than
C. Equal D. The same
Answer: A
89. One of the most popular rope style is:
A. 6 x 7 B. 6 x 19
C. 6 x 37 D. 7 x 7
Answer: B
90. The minimum factor of safety of small hoist is:
A. 3 B. 5
C. 7 D. 9
Answer: C
91. Which of the following is not a classification of iron ore?
A. Hematite B. Magnetite
C. Sulfurite D. Siderite
Answer: C
92. Of the following metals, which will respond to heat treatment?
A. Cast iron B. Wrought iron
C. Medium iron D. Low carbon iron
Answer: C
93. Materials, usually ceramics, employed where resistance to
very high temperature
is required, as for furnace linings and metal melting pots.
A. Refractories B. Gaskets
 108

C. Insulators D. Safety shield

Answer: A
94. The softening of metals by heat treatment and most commonly
consists of heating
the metals up to near molten state and then cooling them very
slowly.
A. Annealing B. Hardening
C. Normalizing D. Tempering
Answer: A
95. The process of producing a variety of surfaces by using a
circular type cutter with
multiple teeth.
A. Milling B. Drilling
C. Broaching D. Boring
Answer: A
96. The process of working metals by the application of sudden
blows or by a steady
pressure.
A. Rolling B. Forging
C. Casting D. Turning
Answer: B
97. A welding operation in which a non-ferrous filler metal melts at
a temperature
below that of the metal joined but is heated above 450 0C.
A. Spot welding B. Gas welding
C. Brazing D. Arc welding
Answer: C
98. The operation of cooling heated piece of work rapidly by
dropping it in water,
brine or oil.
A. Quenching B. Tempering
C. Annealing D. Normalizing]
Answer: A
99. A machine tool in which an abrasive wheel is used as a cutting
tool to obtain a very
 109

high degree of accuracy and a smooth finish on metal parts,

including soft and
hardened steel.
A. Grinding machine B. Broaching machine

C. Milling machine D. Boring machine

Answer: A
100. A machine tool used principally to machine flat or place
surfaces with a single
point cutting tool.
A. Shaper B. Planer
C. Grinder D. Broaching machine
Answer: A

ELEMENTS 8
 110

1. Which type of gear is a cylinder, wheel or disk on the surface of

which is cut parallel
teeth?
A. Bevel gear B. Helical gear

C. Spur gear D. Worm gear

Answer: C
2. Which type of gear has a ratio of 1:1?
A. Herringbone gears B. Miter gear
C. Internal gear D. Spur gear
Answer: B
3. The distance between similar sides of adjacent teeth measured
on the pitch line is
called:
A. Diametral pitch B. Linear pitch
C. Circular pitch D. Axial pitch
Answer: C
4. In rack gear, circular pitch is called:
A. Linear pitch B. Base pitch
C. Diametral pitch D. Axial pitch
Answer: A
5. _____ is equal to twice the addendum.
A. Tooth flank B. Tooth thickness
C. Whole depth D. Working depth
Answer: D
6. The meaning of module in a gearing system is:
A. Distance B. Addendum
C. Measure D. None of these
Answer: C
7. Refers to the portion of the tooth surface adjacent to the
involute lying inside a
radial line passing through an imaginary intersection of the
involute and the base
circle.
A. Over cut B. Under cut
 111

C. Tip relief D. None of these

Answer: B
8. In a pair of gears, spur or bevel, the smaller is often called:
A. Rack B. Pinion
C. Worm D. Idler
Answer: B
9. Which of the following gears that are of the same and transmit
motion at right
angles?
A. Herringbone gears B. Spur gears
C. Miter gears D. Rack gears
Answer: C
10. The cone, which represents in bevel gears the original friction
surfaces are called:
A. Back cone B. Length of cone
C. Pitch cones D. Cone distance
Answer: C
11. A tool used for measuring diameters.
A. Micrometer B. Tachometer
C. Pyrometer D. Caliper
Answer: D
12. The total permissible variation in the size of a dimension; the
difference between
the limits of the size.
A. Tolerance B. Fits
C. Allowance D. Clearance
Answer: A
13. The maximum stress to which a material can be subjected
without a trace of any
permanent set remaining upon a complete withdrawal of the
stress.
A. Ultimate stress B. Rupture stress
C. Elastic limit D. Proportional limit
Answer: C
14. Fluid film desired between two surfaces having relative sliding
motion.
 112

A. Lubrication B. Seal
C. Packing D. Safety shield
Answer: A
15. A total deformation measured in the direction of the line of
stress.
A. Stress B. Strain
C. Endurance limit D. Poisson’s ratio
Answer: B
16. A kind of gear used for heavy duty works where a large ratio of
speed is required
and is extensively used in speed reducers.
A. Worm gear B. Spiral gear
C. Helical gear D. Bevel gear
Answer: A
17. A kind of gear used to transmit motion form one shaft to
another shaft at an angle
to the first.
A. Worm gear B. Spiral gear
C. Helical gear D. Bevel gear
Answer: D
18. The area of the machine shop where metal is being melted to
form a new shape is:
A. Welding area B. Mass production area

C. Foundry area D. Tool and die

Answer: C
19. A machine used in shaping metal by means of abrasive wheel
or removal of metals
with an abrasive is called:
A. Planer B. Power saw
C. Shaper D. Grinding machine
Answer: D
20. The ability of material or metal to resist being crushed is:
A. Compressive strength B. Fatigue strength
C. Torsional strength D. Bending strength
Answer: A
 113

21. Which of the following angles equals the pitch angle?

A. Back angle B. Front angle
C. Face angle D. Root angle
Answer: B
22. The surface between the flanks of adjacent teeth.
A. Top land B. Tooth flank
C. Tooth face D. Bottom land
Answer: D
23. The portion of the common tangent to the base circles along
which contact
between mating involutes occurs.
A. Line of action B. Pitch line
C. Arc of action D. Angle of action
Answer: A
24. The intersection between the axes of the line of centers and
the common tangent
to the base circles.
A. Pitch line B. Pitch circle
C. Pitch point D. Pitch surface
Answer: B
25. The angle between the element of the face cone and its axis.
A. Face angle B. Back angle
C. Front angle D. Increment angle
Answer: A
26. Refers to a portion of the small end of the tooth.
A. Heel B. Toe
C. Sole D. Corner
Answer: B
27. The apex of the pitch cone.
A. Cone vertex B. Cone distance
C. Cone radius D. Cone center
Answer: D
28. Gear pump used in hydraulic system are used for:
A. Low and medium pressure B. Medium and high
pressure
 114

C. Low and high pressure D. Medium and nit high

pressure
Answer: A
29. In machine tool drive, the modulus for gears is usually
selected between:
A. 10 ≥ µ ≥ 1 B. 2 ≥ µ ≥ 1
C. 20 ≥µ ≥ 1 D. 5 ≥ µ ≥ 1
Answer: A
30. The shape of the curve ion the side of gear is termed as:
A. Stub B. Involute
C. Trochoid D. Cycloid
Answer: B
31. A machining operation whereby the tool rotates while the feed
is stationary.
A. Shaping B. Milling
C. Turning D. Reaming
Answer: B
32. A machining operation whereby the tool reciprocates and the
feed is stationary.
A. Reaming B. Planing
C. Shaping D. Turning
Answer: C
33. Which of the following metals is easy to chisel?
A. Alloy steel B. Stainless steel
C. Manganese steel D. Cast iron steel
Answer: C
34. Ferrous metals contain relatively large amount of:
A. Carbon B. Manganese
C. Phosphorous D. Sulfur
Answer: A
35. Which of the following is not a strength property of metals?
A. Tensile strength B. Rocking strength
C. Fatigue strength D. Torsional strength
Answer: B
36. Which of the following is not a kind of mandrel?
 115

A. Expansion mandrel B. Contraction mandrel

C. Taper mandrel D. Gang mandrel

Answer: B
37. Which of the following is not a part of lathe machine?
A. Tailstock B. Headstock
C. Carriage D. Fan
Answer: D
38. The range of motor power in kW of a universal milling
machine, max feed
movement 1270 mm lengthwise, 355 mm lateral, 508 mm
vertical is:
A. 11 to 15 kW B. 16 to 21 kW
C. 7.5 to 10 kW D. 22 to 30 kW
Answer: A
39. The motor power in kW of a punch press, 50.8 mm hole
diameter, 25.4 mm
thickness, for soft steel is:
A. 15 kW B. 21 kW
C. 7.5 kW D. 30 kW
Answer: C
40. The range of motor power in kW of a cylindrical grinding
machine 600 x 50 mm
wheel size, 2,400 to 4,200 mm center distance is:
A. 11 to 15 kW B. 16 to 21 kW
C. 7.5 kW D. 22 to 30 kW
Answer: A
41. The distance in a straight line from one side of a tooth to the
side at points where
the pitch circle passes through the tooth.
A. Circular pitch B. Pitch
C. Chordal thickness D. Tooth length
Answer: C
42. The ______ of a bevel gear is equal to the altitude of the pitch
cone.
A. Length of cone B. Vertex distance
 116

C. Length of hub D. Thickness

Answer: B
43. The _____ of a worm is the distance between the center of
one tooth and the
center of an adjacent tooth, measured perpendicular to the
teeth.
A. Diametral pitch B. Circular pitch
C. Axial pitch D. Normal pitch
Answer: D
44. The ______ of a worm gear is the concave surface of the gear
tooth.
A. Radius B. Throat
C. Pitch D. Addendum
Answer: B
45. A type of gear, which is used for heavy duty work where a
large ratio of speed is
required.
A. Worm gear B. Bevel gear
C. Spur gear D. Miter gear
Answer: A
46. A ______ is a cylinder with teeth resembling those of an acme
thread.
A. Pinion B. Spur
C. Worm D. Bolt
Answer: C
47. The _______ is the angle at which the teeth of a helical gear
are slanted across the
face of the gear.
A. Lead angle B. Helix angle
C. Pressure angle D. Pitch angle
Answer: B
48. A _____ is one thicker in proportion to its length than the
involute tooth.
A. Hypoid B. Cycloidal tooth
C. Stub tooth D. Spiral
Answer: C
 117

49. Which gears are used to connect parallel shafts lying in the
same plane?
A. Worm gears B. Bevel gears
C. Herringbone gears D. Spiral gears
Answer: C
50. Which of the following is used to connect the shafts at an
angle but lying in same
plane?
A. Helical gears B. Worm and worm
wheel
C. Spur gears D. Herringbone gears
Answer: B
51. The motor power in kW of a forming or bending machine 1600
mm width, 508 mm
head movement is:
A. 7.5 kW B. 11 kW
C. 15 kW D. 22 kW
Answer: C
52. The range of motor power in kW of an engine lathe machine,
average service 1000 mm to 1300 mm swing.
A. 11 to 15 kW B. 7.5 to 10 kW
C. 16 to 21 kW D. 22 to 30 kW
Answer: D
53. A machine which can flatten surfaces on a horizontal, vertical
or angular plane.
A. Shaper B. Planer
C. Power saw D. Tool grinder
Answer: A
54. The ability of metal to withstand forces thus following a
number of twist.
A. Shear strength B. Bearing strength
C. Endurance limit D. Deformation
Answer: A
55. A property of material which relates the lateral strain to the
longitudinal strain.
 118

A. Stress B. Modulus of elasticity

C. Poisson’s ratio D. Deformation

Answer: C
56. A total resistance that a material offers to an applied load.
A. Friction force B. Stress
C. Rigidity D. Compressive force
Answer: B
57. A total deformation measured in the direction of the line of
stress.
A. Strain B. Elasticity
C. Elongation D. Contraction
Answer: A
58. An alloy of copper and zinc.
A. Aluminum B. Brass
C. Bronze D. Chromium
Answer: B
59. A metallic element of copper-tin alloy.
A. Aluminum B. Brass
C. Bronze D. Chromium
Answer: C
60. A metallic element and only metal that is liquid at ordinary
temperature.
A. Aluminum B. Mercury
C. Zirconium D. Zinc
Answer: B
61. The product of circular pitch and diametral pitch is:
A. 2π B. π
C. 3π D. 4π
Answer: B
62. A line drawn through all the points at which the teeth touch
each other.
A. Angle of contact B. Arc of contact
C. Path of contact D. Arc of approach
Answer: C
 119

63. The length of the gear tooth measured along an element of

the pitch surface is
called:
A. Acting flank B. Face width
C. Flank of the tooth D. Tooth space
Answer: B
64. The ______ is equal to the tooth thickness plus the space
width.
A. Normal pitch B. Axial pitch
C. Diametral pitch D. Circular pitch
Answer: D
65. The ______ is the arc of the pitch circle where the tooth profile
cuts the pitch
circle when a pair of teeth first comes in contact until they are
in contact as the
pitch point.
A. Arc of recess B. Arc of approach
C. Arc of contact D. Arc of action
Answer: B
66. The _____ traced by the outermost corner of one tooth on the
plane of the other
gear.
A. Cycloid B. Hypocycloid
C. Epitrochoid D. Trochoid
Answer: C
67. An imaginary circle passing through the points at which the
tooth of the meshing gears contact each other.
A. Pitch circle B. Base circle
C. Adendum circle D. Dedendum circle
Answer: A
68. A gear with teeth on the outer cylindrical surface.
A. Rack gear B. Zerol gear
C. Miter gear D. External gear
Answer: D
69. The diameter of a circle coinciding with the top of the teeth of
an internal gear.
 120

A. Dedendum diameter B. Pitch diameter

C. Base diameter D. Internal diameter
Answer: D
70. It is standard practice to assume that the thickness of the tooth
measured sound
the pitch circle is exactly _____the circle path.
A. One half B. One third
C. One fourth D. One fifth
Answer: A
71. Any material that retards the flow of electricity used to prevent
passage or escape
of electric current from conductors.
A. Refractory B. Ceramics
C. Coating material D. Insulator
Answer: D
72. The maximum stress to which a material may be subjected
before failure occurs.
A. Rupture strength B. Ultimate strength
C. Yield strength D. Proportional strength
Answer: B
73. The maximum stress induced in a material when subjected to
alternating or
repeated loading without causing failure.
A. Ultimate strength B. Yield strength
C. Endurance limit D. Rupture strength
Answer: C
74. Fluid film desired between two surfaces having relatively
sliding motion.
A. Lube oil B. Graphite
C. Packing D. Lubrication
Answer: D
75. The ability of metal to withstand loads without breaking down.
A. Strength B. Elasticity
C. Rigidity D. Deformation
Answer: C
 121

76. Materials, usually ceramics, employed where resistance to

very high temperature is required, as for furnace linings and metal
melting pots.
A. Insulators B. Gaskets
C. Packings D. Refractories
Answer: D
77. An alloying element used principally to produce stainless steel.
A. Aluminum B. Brass
C. Bronze D. Chromium
Answer: D
78. A coating material used to produce galvanized iron
. A. Zirconium B. Zinc
C. Aluminum D. Chromium
Answer: B
79. A group of thin steel strips used for measuring clearances.
A. Feeler gage B. Tachometer
C. Micrometer D. Caliper
Answer: A
80. A hand tool used to measure tension in bolts.
A. Torque wrench B. Tachometer
C. Shaver D. Tensor
Answer: A
81. The helix angles for herringbone gears are used from ____ fro
industrial gears.
A. 10 to 15 B. 15 to 20
C. 20 to 30 D. 25 to 45
Answer: C
82. The distance parallel to the axis from the pitch circle to the
face of the shoulder or
hub.
A. Back one B. Backing
C. Crown height D. Apex distance
Answer: B
83. A machine that makes gear teeth by means of a reciprocating
cutter that rotates
slowly with the work.
 122

A. Gear forming B. Gear hobber

C. Gear shaper D. Gear cutter
Answer: C
84. A type of gear wheels connecting non-parallel, non-
intersecting shafts usually at
right angles.
A. Helical gear B. Herringbone gear

C. Hypoid gear D. Bevel gear

Answer: C
85. The angle between the plane of the pitch circle and a plane
tangent to the end of the tooth.
A. Front angle B. Back angle
C. Dedendum angle D. Face angle
Answer: B
86. The circle containing the bottoms of the tooth spaces.
A. Root circle B. Working depth circle
C. Base circle D. Pitch circle
Answer: A
87. The depth of the tooth inside of the pitch line is called:
A. Working depth B. Dedendum
C. Total depth D. Whole depth
Answer: B
88. The amount by which the dedendum in a given gear exceeds
the addendum of its
mating gear.
A. Whole depth B. Clearance
C. Backlash D. Working depth
Answer: B
89. The outside diameter of the worm gear measured on the
central plane.
A. Dedendum diameter B. Addendum diameter
C. Throat diameter D. Pitch diameter
Answer: C
90. The circle form which the involute is generated.
A. Base circle B. Pitch circle
 123

C. Working depth circle D. Addendum circle

Answer: A
91. Ratio of pitch diameter to the number of teeth.
A. Diametral pitch B. Module
C. Contact ratio D. Helical overlap
Answer: B
92. A circle the radius of which is equal to the distance from the
gear axis to the pitch
point.
A. Pitch circle B. Root circle
C. Base circle D. Outside circle
Answer: A
93. A circle coinciding with a tangent to the bottom of he tooth
spaces.
A. Pitch circle B. Root circle
C. Base circle D. Outside circle
Answer: B
94. The method of cold working by compression.
A. Broaching B. Lapping
C. Piercing D. Reaming
Answer: C
95. A machine tool used to finish internal and external surfaces by
the use of a cutter
called a broach, which a series of cutting edges or teeth.
A. Lathe machine B. Broaching machine
C. Planer D. Shaper
Answer: B
96. A cutting tool which is made to move slowly while acting on
the work which
revolving on a horizontal axis.
A. Lathe machine B. Broaching machine
C. Planer D. Shaper
Answer: A
97. A machining tool used to produce a variety of surfaces by
using a circular type
cutter with multiple teeth.
 124

A. Lathe machine B. Milling machine

C. Broaching machine D. Grinding machine
Answer: B
98. Used in the production of flat surfaces on pieces too large or
too heavy to hold in a
shaper.
A. Planer B. Shaper
C. Grinder D. Lathe
Answer: A
99. Used to machine flat or curved surfaces with a tool which
moves in a reciprocating
motion.
A. Planer B. Shaper
C. Grinder D. Lathe
Answer: B

100. A material that can wear away a substance softer than itself.
A. Abrasive B. Tungsten
C. Carbon D. Corrosive
Answer: A

ELEMENTS 9

1. To avoid brittleness of weld or the residual stress in the

welding, it is normally stress
relieved of:
A. Quenching B. Normalizing
C. Tempering D. Drawing
Answer: B
2. A type of welding whereby a wire or powder from the nozzle of
a spray gun is fused
by a as flame, arc of plasma jet and then molten particles are
projected in a form of
 125

a spray by means of compressed air or gas is known as:

A. Electro-slug building B. Electro-beam welding
C. Plasma-arc welding D. Metal Spray Welding
Answer: D
3. Weld metal impact specimen shall be taken across the weld
with one face
substantially parallel to and within.
A. ¾ in B. 1/32 in
C. ¼ in D. 1/16 in
Answer: C
4. A joint between to overlapping members in whom the
overlapped edge of one
member is welded with a fillet weld is called:
A. A Single Welded Lap Point
B. Double Welded Lap Point
C. A Single-Welded Lap Point with Backing
D. Track Weld
Answer: A
5. A weld place in a groove between two butting members is
called:
A. Full-Fillet Weld B. Tack Weld
C. Butt Weld D. Fillet Weld
Answer: C
6. A weld of approximately triangular cross-section that join two
surfaces at
approximately right angles as in lap joint, tee joint, corner joint.
A. Single Welded Lap Joint B. Fillet Weld
C. Tack Weld D. Butt Weld
Answer: B
7. A fillet weld whose size is equal to the thickness of the inner
joint member is called:
A. Butt Joint B. Butt Weld
C. Tack Weld D. Full-Fillet Weld
Answer: D
8. A weld made to hold the parts of a weldment in proper
alignment until the final
 126

welds are made of:

A. Butt Weld B. Tack Weld
C. Fillet Weld D. Full Fillet Weld
Answer: B
9. Test is designed primarily for application to electric-welded
tubing for detection of
lack of penetration or overlaps resulting from flash removal in
the weld.
A. Butt Weld B. Paste
C. Lap Weld D. Double Butt Weld
Answer: C
10. The internal stresses existing in a welded connection are:
A. Relieved by X-ray Analysis
B. Maybe relieved when weld is penned
C. Not relieved when the weld is penned
D. Not relieved by heat treatment
Answer: C
11. A tool with hardened steel points used for scribing or laying of
distances.
A Plain scriber B. Divider
C. A trammel D. Hermaphrodite
Answer: B
12. A machine tool used principally to machine flat or plane
surfaces with a single
pointed tool.
A. Shaper B. Planer
C. Drill D. Power saw
Answer: A
13. A machine tool in which an abrasive wheel is used as a cutting
tool to obtain a very
smooth finish.
A. Broaching machine B. Planer
C. Tool grinder D. Milling machine
Answer: C
14. The process of working metals by the application of sudden
blows or by steady
 127

pressure.
A. Casting B. Turning
C. Forging D. Rolling
Answer: C
15. The operation of cooling a heated piece of work rapidly by
dipping it in water, brine or oil.
A. Quenching B. Annealing
C. Tempering D. Normalizing
Answer: A
16. The softening of metal by heat treatment and most commonly
consists of heating
the metal up to near molten state and then cooling it very
slowly.
A. Annealing B. Indexing
C. Knurling D. Soldering
Answer: A
17. Fluid film desired between surfaces relative sliding motion.
A. Lube oil B. Lubrication
C. Grease D. Graphite
Answer: B
18. A kind of gear used to transmit motion from one shaft to
another shaft to another
shaft at an angle to the first.
A. Worm gear B. Bevel gear
C. Helical gear D. Spur gear
Answer: B
19. The principal material used in high production metal working
tools.
A. Hyper-eutectoid B. High speed steel
C. Lead D. High speed carbon
Answer: B
20. Heavy rotating body which serves as a reservoir for absorbing
and redistributing
kinetic energy.
A. Flywheel B. Governor
C. Shaft D. Puncher
 128

Answer: A
21. A welding operation in which non-ferrous filler metal melts at
a temperature
below that of the metal joined but is heated above 450 C.
A. Spot Welding B. Gas Welding
C. Brazing D. Arc Welding
Answer: C
22. Uniting two pieces of metal by means of s different metal
which is applied
between the two in molten state.
A. Casting B. Welding
C. Soldering D. Brazing
Answer: C
23. Joining metal by means of high current at low voltage. During
the passage of
current, pressure by the electrodes produces a forge weld.
A. Spot Welding B. Resistance Welding

C. Steam Welding D. Gas Welding

Answer: B
24. A fusion process in which the metal is heated together into a
solid joint.
A. Electric arc welding B. Gas welding
C. Spot welding D. Projection welding
Answer: A
25. As one example, the ASME code for riveted joints permits the
design surface
compressive stress to be about ______ higher than the design
tensile stress.
A. 40% B. 50%
C. 60% D. 70%
Answer: C
26. In a pressure vessel, the ratio of minimum strength of joint to
the strength of solid
joint is known as:
A. Efficiency B. Joint efficiency
 129

C. Performance factor D. Relative strength

Answer: D
27. In a pressure vessel, the usual factor of safety may be taken
as:
A. 2 B. 3
C. 4 D. 5
Answer: D
28. Are resistance welds, usually round in the same form as the
electrodes that press
the sheets together.
A. Edge joint B. MIG welds
C. Spot welds D. TIG welds
Answer: C
29. Consists of short lengths (2 to 3 inches long) of welds with
space between as 6 inches on centers.
A. Intermittent weld B. MIG welds
C. Spot welds D. TIOG welds
Answer: A
30. An intermittent weld, lightly done to hold the members in
position for assembly
purposes or for principal welding.
A. Edge weld B. Tack welds
C. Back welds D. Half welds
Answer: B
31. A machine used in shaping metal by means of an abrasive
wheel or the removal of
metals with an abrasive is called:
A. Planer machine B. Power saw
C. Shaper machine D. Grinding machine
Answer: D
32. Which of the following is not a part of lathe machine?
A. Tailstock B. Fan
C. Carriage D. Headstock
Answer: B
33. Which of the following is easy to chisel?
A. Cast iron B. Alloy steel
 130

C. Cast steel D. Manganese steel

Answer: D
34. A machining operation whereby the tool reciprocates and the
feed stationary is
called:
A. Shaping B. Reaming
C. Planning D. Turning
Answer: A
35. Which of the following is not a kind of mandrel?
A. Expansion mandrel B. Taper mandrel
C. Contraction mandrel D. Foundry mandrel
Answer: C
36. The area of the machine shop where the metal is being melted
to form a new
shape.
A. Welding area B. Mass production area

C. Foundry area D. Tool and die area

Answer: C
37. Which of the following is not used to temper steel?
A. Brine salt bath B. Oil bath
C. Water bath D. Steam bath
Answer: D
38. Which of the following is not a kind of cast iron?
A. Malleable iron B. Head iron
C. Gray iron D. White iron
Answer: B
39. The kind of center which is being attached and meshed to the
tailstock spindle
which is also static while the work is rotating.
A. Dead center B. Live center
C. Focal center D. Work center
Answer: A
40. Which of the following is not part of the headstock?
A. Spindle B. Anvil
C. Back gear D. Motor
 131

Answer: B
41. A welding operation that uses hot flame and metal rod is
known as:
A. Gas welding B. Arc welding
C. Resistance welding D. Automatic welding
Answer: A
42. The arc is covered with a welding composition and bare
electrode wire is fed
automatically.
A. Resistance welding B. Submerged arc
welding
C. Induction welding D. Spot welding
Answer: B
43. Treating the weld as a line, the amount of inertia about canter
of gravity of a
circular weld of diameter would be:
A. πd2/36 B. πd2/6
C. πd3/36 D. πd3/4
Answer: D
44. For butt welding of two plates each of which is 25 mm thick,
the best process
would be:
A. TIG welding B. MIG welding
C. Gas welding D. Electro slag welding
Answer: D
45. What should be at maximum size of the fillet weld?
A. 2 mm B. 3 mm
C. 5 mm D. 7 mm
Answer: B
46. The maximum size of the fillet weld that can be made in single
pass is:
A. 3 mm B. 6 mm
C. 8 mm D. 12 mm
Answer: B
47. Which diamond riveted joint can be adopted?
A. Butt joint B. Lap joint
 132

C. Double riveted lap joint D. All types of joints

Answer: A
48. Wiping is the process of:
A. Applying flux during welding process
B. Cleaning the welded surface after the welding operation
is over
C. Connecting load pipes by soldering alloy
D. Low temperature welding
Answer: C
49. A collimated light beam is used for producing heat in:
A. Laser welding B. MIG welding
C. Plasma welding D. TIG welding
Answer: A
50. During MIG welding, the metal in transferred in the form of:
A. A fine spray of metal B. Continuous flow of
molten metal
C. Electron beam D. Solution
Answer: A
51. Which process does not belong to the group?
A. Vise grip B. Adjustable wrench
C. Torque wrench D. Feeler gage
Answer: D
52. Which does not belong to the group?
A. Resistance welding B. Soldering
C. Hardening D. Brazing
Answer: C
53. Substances having sufficient carbon and/or hydrogen for
chemical oxidation to produce exothermally, worthwhile quantities
of heat.
A. Lubrication B. Graphite
C. Grease D. Fuels
Answer: D
54. A device that measures atmospheric pressure.
A. Piezometer B. Hydrometer
C. Barometer D. Odometer
Answer: C
 133

55. The mass of the body per unit volume.

A. Volume flow rate B. Density
C. Weight D. Mass
Answer: B
56. Subjecting a substance to a high temperature below the fusion
point, usually to
make it friable.
A. Calcinations B. Fusion
C. Boiling D. Superheating
Answer: A
57. A special metal formed when two or more metals are melted
together.
A. Monel B. Alloy
C. Solder D. Hastalloy
Answer: B
58. The ability of a moving body to perform work.
A. Internal energy B. Potential energy
C. Kinetic energy D. Flow work
Answer: C
59. Hardening the surface of iron-based alloys by heating them
below the melting
point in contact with a carbonaceous substance.
A. Carburizing B. Normalizing
C. Martempering D. Hardening
Answer: A
60. Any material that retard the flow of electricity, used to prevent
or escape of
electric current from conductors.
A. Bricks B. Insulators
C. Refractories D. Ceramics
Answer: B
61. If “t” is the thickness of sheet to be spot welded then electrode
tip diameter is
equal to:
A. t B. 1.5 t
C. 2.5 t D. 2 t
 134

Answer: A
62. Weld spatter refers to:
A. Flux B. Filler material
C. Welding defect D. Welding electrode
Answer: C
63. Which of the following metals can be suitably welded by TIG
welding?
A. Aluminum B. Magnesium
C. A and B D. Stainless steel
Answer: C
64. Arc blow takes place in:
A. Ac welding when straight polarity is used
B. Arc welding when reverse polarity is used
C. Gas welding
D. Welding stainless steel
Answer: D
65. Unlike materials or materials of different thickness can be butt
welded by:
A. Adjusting initial gap
B. Adjusting time duration of current
C. Control of pressure and current
D. All of the above
Answer: C
66. The phenomenon of weld decay takes place in:
A. Brass B. Bronze
C. Cast iron D. Stainless steel
Answer: D
67. Laser welding is widely used in:
A. Electronic industry B. Heavy industry
C. Process industry D. Structural industry
Answer: A
68. Up to what thickness of plate, edge preparation for welding is
not needed?
A. 2 mm B. 4 mm
C. 8 mm D. 12 mm
Answer: B
 135

69. Grey cast iron is best welded by:

A. Arc B. MIG
C. Oxy-acetylene D. TIG
Answer: C
70. Resistance welding, the pressure is released.
A. Just at the time of passing the current
B. After completion of currents
C. After the weld cools
D. During heating
Answer: C
71. Material, usually ceramics, employed where resistance to very
high temperature is
required as for furnace linings and metal melting pots.
A. Bricks B. Insulators
C. Refractories D. Ceramics
Answer: C
72. A device used to prevent leakage of media.
A. Packing B. Safety shield
C. Gasket D. Seals
Answer: D
73. The internal resistance a material offers to being deformed
and is measured in
terms of applied load.
A. Strain B. Elasticity
C. Stress D. Resilience
Answer: C
74. The deformation that results from a stress and is expressed in
terms of the amount
of deformation per inch.
A. Elongation B. Strain
C. Poisson’s ratio D. Elasticity
Answer: B
75. The ability of the material to return to its original shape after
being elongated or
distorted when the forces are released.
A. Elasticity B. Brittleness
 136

C. Plasticity D. Creep
Answer: A
76. The last point at which a material may be stretched and still
return to its
undeformed condition upon release of the stress.
A. Rupture limit B. Elastic limit
C. Proportional limit D. Ultimate limit
Answer: B
77. The ratio of stress to strain within the elastic limit.
A. Creep B. Modulus of rigidity

C. Modulus of elasticity D. Poisson’s ratio

Answer: C
78. The ability of metal to withstand forces that causes a member
to twist.
A. Shear strength B. Tensile strength
C. Bearing strength D. Torsional strength
Answer: D
79. The ability of a material to resist being crushed.
A. Tensile strength B. Shearing strength
C. Compressive strength D. Torsion
Answer: C
80. The ability of metal to stretch, bend or twist without breaking or
cracking.
A. Elasticity B. Ductility
C. Brittleness D. Plasticity
Answer: B
81. Half corner weld is used:
A. Where severe loading is encountered and the upper
surface of both pieces
must be in the same plane
B. Where efficiency of joint should be 50%
C. Where longitudinal shear is present
D. None of these
Answer: D
82. Projection welding is:
 137

A. Continuous spot welding process

B. Multi-spot welding process
C. Used to form frameworks
D. All of these
Answer: B
83. Reducing flame is obtained in oxy-acetylene welding with:
A. Excess oxygen B. Excess of acetylene

C. Equal parts of both gases D. Reduced acetylene

Answer: B
84. Brasses and bronzes are welded using:
A. Carburizing B. Neutral flame
C. Oxidizing flame D. Reducing flame
Answer: B
85. One of the following functions is not performed by coating on
the welding
electrodes is to:
A. Increase the cooling rate B. Provide protective
atmosphere
C. Refuse oxidation D. Stabilize the arc
Answer:
86. Welding defect called arc blow occurs in:
A. Arc welding using ac current B. Arc welding using dc
current
C. Gas welding D. MIG welding
Answer: D
87. The purpose of using flux in soldering is to:
A. Increase fluidity of solder material
B. Full up gaps in bad joint
C. Prevent oxide formation
D. Lower melting temperature of the solder
Answer: A
88. The parts are lapped and held in place under pressure.
A. Butt welding B. Spot welding
C. Steam welding D. Projection welding
Answer: B
 138

89. The part are brought together lightly with current flowing and
then separated
slightly.
A. Mash weld B. Steam weld
C. Flush welding D. Percussion welding
Answer: C
90. Which of the following produced a series of spot welds made
by circular or wheel
type electrodes?
A. Steam welding B. Mash welding
C. Spot welding D. Steam welding
Answer: A/D
91. The property of a material which resist forces action to pull the
material apart.
A. Shear strength B. Tensile strength
C. Compressive strength D. Bearing strength
Answer: B
92. The property of steel which resist indention or penetration.
A. Hardness B. Elasticity
C. Ductility D. None of these
Answer: A
93. In the color coding of pipe, the color for pipeline of air is:
A. Light blue B. Light orange
C. White D. Green
Answer: A
94. In the color coding of pipe, the color for a pipeline of water is:
A. Light blue B. Green
C. Brown D. Silver grey
Answer: B
95. In the color coding of pipe, the color for pipeline of steam is:
A. Light orange B. White
C. Silver grey D. Light blue
Answer: C
96. The color for a pipeline of electricity in the color coding of pipe
is:
A. Light orange B. White
 139

C. Silver grey D. Light blue

Answer: A
97. In the color coding of pipe, the color for pipeline of
communication is:
A. Light blue B. White
C. Brown D. Light orange
Answer: B
98. The color of pipeline of fuel oil in the color coding of pipe is:
A. Light blue B. Brown
C. White D. Light orange
Answer: B
99. For high speed application, the minimum number of teeth in
small number of
teeth in small sprocket should be:
A. 18 to 24 B. 26 to 30
C. 14 to 18 D. 24 to 28
Answer: A
100. The good deoxidizer in steel melting is:
A. Manganese B. Aluminum
C. Silicon D. All of these
Answer: D
 140

ELEMENTS 10

1. Fast process of analyzing all elements and a chemical

components of steel casting is:
A. Pyrometer B. Carbon Analyzer
C. Wet Analyzer D. Spectrometer
Answer: D
2. Which of the following is not a kind of mandrel?
A. Expanded B. Extended
C. Contraction D. Taper
Answer: C
3. A cutting tool angle between the side cutting edge and the
plane perpendicular to
direction of feed travel is ____ angle.
A. Side Relief B. Side Cutting Edge

C. Lead D. Side Rake

Answer: D
4. A section in a machine shop operation is called:
A. Core Making B. Machining
C. Fitting D. Pattern
Answer: B
5. The tool bit made of tool blank consists of face, nose, shank
and ______.
A. Cutting Edge B. None of these
C. Round Nose D. Nose
Answer: D
6. The cutting tool used the shaper are similar to turning tools of
_____ machine.
A. Planer B. Broaching
C. Boring D. Lathe
Answer: A
 141

7. The blades for hacksaw have number of teeth range of:

A. 15 – 38 teeth B. 14 – 32 teeth
C. 12 – 30 teeth D. 12 – 32 teeth
Answer: B
8. _________ no part of the headstock.
A. Back Gear B. Spindle
C. Anvil D. Motor
Answer: C
9. _________ is a lathe carriage part that bridge across the bed to
carry the cross slide
and tool rest.
A. Automatic Feed B. Apron
C. Compound Rest D. Saddle
Answer: C
10. What is the recommended cutting speed range for bronze in
fpm?
A. 60/70 B. 200/250
C. 80/60 D. 100/110
Answer: B
11. In majority of machine members, the damping capacity of the
material should be:
A. Zero B. High
C. Low D. Anything
Answer: B
12. For moderate speed of mating gears, the ideal ratio of contact
is:
A. 1.35 – 1.55 B. 1.0 – 1.3
C. 1.25 – 1.45 D. 1.25 – 4.0
Answer: D
13. The crest diameter of a screw thread is same as:
A. Pitch diameter B. Minor diameter
C. Major diameter D. Base diameter
Answer: C
14. For a high corrosion resistant stainless steel, what minimum
chromium content is
required?
 142

A. 8.0% B. 4.5%
C. 1.5% D. 8.5%
Answer: A
15. At quite low temperatures (say-750C) the notched bar impact
value steel.
A. Increases significantly C. Remain unchanged
B. Decreases significantly D. Depends on heat
treatment
Answer: B
16. In order to realize the advantage of fluid friction, it is essential
to have:
A. No oil film B. Converging oil film
C. Diverging oil film D. Parallel oil film in bearing
Answer: D
17. Zero axial thrust is experienced in:
A. Herringbone gears B. Helical gears
C. Bevel gears D. Worm gears
Answer: A
18. The maximum size of the fillet weld that can be made in single
pass is:
A. 3 mm B. 6 mm
C. 7 mm D. 4 mm
Answer: B
19. Muntz metal contains:
A. Copper – aluminum B. Copper – tin
C. Copper – nickel D. Copper – zinc
Answer: D
20. Steel balls for ball bearings are manufactured by:
A. Cold heading B. Casting
C. Rolling D. Turning
Answer: A
21. For ordinary turning drilling and milling on low strength steel
the cutting fluid
applied have soluble oil with consistency of 1 part oil to _____
parts water.
A. 10 to 30 B. 10
 143

C. 5 to 10 D. 10 to 20
Answer: D
22. The five principal parts of the shaper are the table, tool slide,
base, ram and
_______.
A. Column B. Vise
C. Drive Motor D. Apron
Answer: B
23. In drilling soft materials use cutting angle as low as 40
degrees but for extremely
hard material up to _____ degrees is recommended.
A. 80 B. 65
C. 75 D. 70
Answer: A
24. An act of cutting out a piece of metal at a desired shape and
size.
A. Broaching B. Blanking
C. Slitting D. Dinking
Answer: B
25. A research agency handling assistance to all foundry, machine
shop and
metallurgical plant operation.
A. MIRDC B. BOI
C. DOST D. All of these
Answer: A
26. Web is a part of a drill and is usually thicker _______.
A. Beside the land B. Nearing the shank
C. Close to the future D. At the tip portion
Answer: B
27. It a symbol ______ that the work surfaces should be
machined-finished and placed
on the line that represents the surface to be machined.
A. f B. 5
C. 20 D. F. A. O.
Answer: A
 144

28. Safety features that must be placed and maintained at

machine, black welding and
foundry shops called:
A. Walkway Shops B. Safety Notices
C. Safety Goggles D. Safety Notices in
Markers / Boards
Answer: D
29. It is axially located rectangular groove in a huh and shaft.
A. Key Seat B. Cotter Pin Seat
C. Flute D. Set Screw Point
Answer: A
30. In a cutting tool, the cutting end can also be generally called:
A. End Cutting Edge B. Nose
C. Back Rake D. Side Rake
Answer: B
31. In general, alloys with high nickel contain retain toughness to
quite low
temperature up to:
A. -2500F B. -3600F
C. -3200F D. -2400F
Answer: C
32. Manganese steel standard designation is SAE ________.
A. 8XXX B. 10XXX
C. 12XXX D. 13XXX
Answer: D
33. A Babbitt is:
A. A cutectic of iron and iron phosphide
B. A gadget for measuring volume
C. A measure of magnetic induction produces in a material
D. Antimony bearing lead or tin alloy
Answer: D
34. The minimum thickness of steel members exposed to weather
and accessible for
painting is:
A. 4 mm B. 6 mm
C. 8 mm D. 10 mm
 145

Answer: D
35. In a standard coarse thread bolt, the stress concentration is
maximum at:
A. All over the surface B. Top surface
C. Root D. Flank
Answer: C
36. Which of the following ropes are more flexible?
A. 6 to 19 B. 6 to 7
C. 8 by 19 D. 6 by 37
Answer: D
37. Tools usually used in wood pattern making in foundry shop.
A. Band saw B. Saws and chisels
C. Knives and drills D. Grinder
Answer: B
38. Type of bolt commonly used in the construction that is
threaded in both ends.
A. Hex bolt B. Stud bolt
C. Square threaded bolts D. Eye bolt
Answer: B
39. Cast iron flywheels are commonly designed with factor of
safety of:
A. 9 to 12 B. 8 to 11
C. 10 to 13 D. 7 to 10
Answer: C
40. Which of the type of chain is used in motorcycle?
A. Silent B. Pintle
C. Bush roller D. Long
Answer: C
41. What factors can modify the recommended cutting speed of
known work piece?
A. Rough cutting of work piece
B. Modify the shape of the cutting tools
C. Use correctly shape of the cutting tools
D. Depth of cut
Answer: D
 146

42. A machine shop equipment that can flatter horizontally,

vertically or angular plane
called:
A. Shaper Machine B. Welding Machine
C. Drill Machine D. Power Saw
Answer: A
43. It is a petroleum by-product used as electrodes in an electric
arc furnace melting
operation.
A. Anthracite Coke B. Foundry Coke
C. Graphite Electrode D. Bituminous Coke
Answer: C
44. Which opf the following is an unsafe condition in operating a
lathe machine?
A. Wearing denim pants/safety shoes
B. Wearing a canvass apron
C. Operating with safety gloves
D. Wearing safety goggles/hearing aid
Answer: B
45. Relief angle of a single-point cutting mild steel cast iron and
other average work as
recommended should be in the ranges of ______ degrees for
high speed tools.
A. 8 to 12 B. 10 to 5
C. 5 to 7 D. 12 to 16
Answer: A
46. Tap not used for cutting thread _______.
A. Tapping Tap B. Bottoming Tap
C. Plugging Tap D. Taper Tap
Answer: A
47. Which of the following tools does not belong to the group?
A. Hermaphrodite Caliper B. Divider
C. Double VEE Block D. Trammel
Answer: C
48. In Machine Shop had forging operation of lengthening a piece
of stock while
 147

reducing the cross-sectional area of work is called:

A. Bloating B. Upsetting
C. Spreading D. Draining
Answer: B
49. Which of the following services is not considered to be a work
of a machinist?
A. Reboring B. Grinding
C. Over Hauling D. Honing
Answer: C
50. Type of chuck wherein the work piece with standard diameter
or size could be
attached fast and quick specially small size work of mass
production called:
A. Lathe Drive Plate B. Clamp Toe Dog
C. Collet Attachment D. Steady Center Rest
Answer: C
51. Spiral gears are suitable for transmitting.
A. Any power B. Small power
C. Huge power D. Pulsating power
Answer: B
52. The type of cam used for low and moderate speed engines is
generally:
A. Flat B. Involute
C. Tangent D. Harmonic
Answer: D
53. Gears for wrist watches are generally manufactured by:
A. Molding B. Stamping
C. Galvanizing D. Honing
Answer: B
54. The rated life of a bearing changes:
A. Inversely as cube of load C. Inversely as square of
load
B. Directly as load D. Inversely as load
Answer: A
55. The best material for brake drum is:
A. Cast iron B. Steel
 148

C. Aluminum D. Wrought iron

Answer: A
56. An elastic body whose primary function is to deflect under
load.
A. Spring B. Brake
C. Stopper D. Clutch
Answer: A
57. Belt slip may take place because of:
A. Loose load B. Heavy belt
C. Driving pulley too small D. All of these
Answer: D
58. Rankine formula is valid up to slenderness ratio of:
A. 60 B. 80
C. 120 D. 150
Answer: C
59. In flange coupling, the weakest element should be:
A. Flange B. Key
C. Bolts D. Shaft
Answer: B
60. A flange coupling is:
A. Used for collinear shaft B. Used for non-collinear
shafts
C. Rigid coupling D. Flexible
Answer: A
61. This particular cutting tool material could with stand cutting
temperature of 1800 F
and higher at cutting speed beyond those possible with other
cutting tool
materials called:
A. Titanium Carbide B. Ceramic
C. Carbide Grade D. Cubic Boron Nitride
Answer: D
62. Common defects encountered in a foundry shop steel casting
operation and also in
welding practices.
A. Cracks B. Cold Shot
 149

C. Parting Line D. Blow / Pin Holes

Answer: D
63. Lathe operator to remove the taper shank from the taper hole
uses drift. It is also
called:
A. Tong B. Morse Taper
C. Chuck Taper D. Tapered Key
Answer: B
64. It is the best instrument for measuring a thousand of an inch.
A. Micrometer B. Tachometer
C. Caiper D. Pyrometer
Answer: A
65. What tool will be used in making wood pattern in the foundry
shop?
A. Band Saw B. Drill Machine
C. Saw and Chisel D. Hammer
Answer: C
66. The usual ratio of water to soluble oil used as cutting fluid is
_______.
A. 50% water to 50% oil B. 2 water to 1 oil
C. 3 water to 1 oil D. 4 to 80 water to 1 oil
Answer: D
67. Machine tool used for laying straight lines on metal surfaces
made of sharp tool
steel is called:
A. Plain Scriber B. A Trammel

C. Hermaphrodite Caliper D. Divider

Answer: A
68. A lathe machine threading mechanism is called:
A. Reverse Gear and Lever B. Spindle Gear
C. Changed Stud Gear D. All of these
Answer: B
69. Which of the following is not used to resemble the shape of
tool bit?
A. Round Nose B. Center Cut
 150

C. Thread Cutting D. Square Nose

Answer: B
70. A lathe with multiple cutting stations called:
A. Turret Lathe B. Engine Lathe
C. Manual Lathe D. None of these
Answer: A
71. Universal coupling is:
A. Used for collinear shafts C. Type of flange coupling
B. Used for non-collinear shafts D. Rigid coupling
Answer: B
72. In powder metallurgy, the process of heating the cold pressed
metal powder is
called:
A. Deposition B. Granulation
C. Sintering D. Precipitation
Answer: C
73. Which one is different from the remaining?
A. Nitriding B. Cyaniding
C. Electroplating D. Flame hardening
Answer: C
74. Splines are used when:
A. The power transmitted is low
B. The power to be transmitted is high
C. Axial relative motion between shafts and hub is
necessary
D. Flame hardening
Answer: C
75. Delta iron occurs at temperature of:
A. Room temperature C. Between 14000C and
1539 C0

B. Above melting point D. Between 10000C and

1400 C0

Answer: C
76. The most important element that controls the physical
properties of steel is:
A. Carbon B. Silicon
 151

C. Manganese D. Tungsten
Answer: A
77. The process commonly used for thermo-plastic material is:
A. Die casting B. Injection moulding
C. Shell moulding D. Cold forming
Answer: B
78. Select the one that has the highest specific gravity.
A. Aluminum B. Lead
C. Brass D. High carbon steel
Answer: B
79. Age-hardening is related with:
A. Cast iron B. Stainless steel
C. Duralumin D. German silver
Answer: C
80. Foundry crucible is made of:
A. German silver B. Lead
C. Mild steel D. Graphite
Answer: D
81. Device used to measure accurately speed called:
A. Speedometer B. Dial Indicator

C. Tachometer D. Dial Gage

Answer: C
82. A mechanism, which usually do the indexing in a machine tool
is called:
A. Universal Chuck B. Slooter
C. Dividing Head D. Indexing
Answer: C
83. Recommended best cutting angle of drill for work on steel or
cast iron is _____
degrees.
A. 48 B. 63
C. 59 D. 50
Answer: C
84. What is the common shop practice to prevent solder from
running away from
 152

surface to be joined?
A. All of these
B. Surround the work with clay
C. Introduce around the work rolled wet cloth
D. Put asbestos sheeting around the work
Answer: A
85. Name the type of chuck commonly used for holding work
piece in a lathe
operation. Example 3-jaw universal chuck, 4-jaw independent
chuck.
A. Magnetic Jaw Chuck B. 2-Jaw Independent
C. 8-Jaw Universal D. Combination
Answer: D
86. A machinery operation whereby done with the work accurately
fastened has a
reciprocating motion and the tool head is stationary is called:
A. Shaping B. Planing
C. Turning D. Reaming
Answer: B
87. What happens to a drill if the operating spped is too fast?
A. Drill will crack
B. Drill will become overheated and will blend
C. Drill will become overheated and will drawn from steel
D. Drill will become very dull and wear dust
Answer: C
88. Which do not belong to foundry or metal casting shop?
A. Shake – Out Machine B. Molding Machine
C. Core Making D. Forging
Answer: D
89. It is an arbitrary modification by moving a small portion of a
tooth material at the
tip of the gear tooth.
A. Tip Removal B. Tip Under Cut
C. Tip Relief D. Pressure Angle Cut
Answer: C
90. What is the difference between the shaper and the planer?
 153

A. The tool of the shaper moves with the planer is

stationary
B. The shaper can perform slotting operation while the
planer cannot
C. The shaper handles large pieces while the planer
handles only small pieces
D. The tool of the shaper moves in reciprocating motion
while the tool in the
planer moves in rotary motion.
Answer: A
91. Trimming is a process associated with:
A. Forging B. Machining of metals
C. Electroplating D. Press of work
Answer: A
92. A plug gauge is used to measure:
A. Taper bores B. Cylindrical bores
C. Spherical holes D. Screw threads
Answer: B
93. In arc welding operations, the current value is decided by:
A. Length of welds portion B. Voltage across the arc
C. Size of the electrode D. Thickness of plate
Answer: C
94. The phenomenon of weld decay takes place in:
A. Cast iron B. Brass
C. Bronze D. Stainless steel
Answer: D
95. Choose the one that will have highest cutting speed.
A. Aluminum B. Brass
C. Bronze D. Cast iron
Answer: A
96. Projection welding is:
A. Continuous spot welding process C. Multispot
welding process
B. Used to make mesh D. Used to form
Answer: C
 154

97. Least shrinkage allowance is provided in the case of which of

the following?
A. Cast iron B. Aluminum
C. White cast iron D. Brass
Answer: C
98. Dilatometer is used to find out which property of molding
sand?
A. Permeability B. Hot strength
C. Fineness D. Moisture content
Answer: C
99. Hastalloy contains:
A. Copper B. Nickel and copper
C. Copper and aluminum D. Nickel and
molybdenum
Answer: D
100. The maximum hardenability of any steel depends on:
A. The carbon content C. The grain size
B. The chemical composition D. The alloying elements
present
Answer: A

ELEMENTS 11

1. One of the causes of spur gear tooth breakage is the

unbalanced load on one end of
breakage is the unbalanced load on one end of the tooth that
results in higher stress
than when the load is evenly distributed. To minimize this
problem, the face width
“b” should not be greater than the thickness of the tooth. In the
absence of test
values, the following can be a guide.
A. 2.5 Pc < b < 4 Pc B. 2.0 < b < 4 Pd
 155

C. 2.5 Pd < b < 4 Pd D. 2.0 Pc < b < 4 Pc

Answer: A
2. Any plane perpendicular to a gear axis is called:
A. Plane of action B. Plane of rotation
C. Normal plane D. Transverse plane
Answer: B
3. The angle between the tooth profile and a radical line at its pitch
point. Involute
teeth the angle between the line of action and line tangent to
the pitch circle.
A. Roll angle B. Pitch angle
C. Helix angle D. Pressure angle
Answer: D
4. The radial distance from the addendum circle to the working
depth circle.
A. Total depth B. Full depth
C. Whole depth D. Working depth
Answer: D
5. The total depth of a tooth space equal to addendum plus
dedendum also equal to
working depth plus clearance.
A. Full depth B. Working
C. Whole depth D. None of these
Answer: C
6. It is a condition in generated gear teeth when any part of the
fillet curve lies inside
of a line drawn to the working profile as its lowest point.
A. Medium cut B. Under cut
C. Over cut D. Hidden cut
Answer: B
7. The curve formed by the path of a point on the extension of the
radius of a circle as
it rolls along the curve or line.
A. Cycloid B. Epicycloids
C. Hypocycloid D. Trochoid
Answer: D
 156

8. A plane perpendicular to the axis plane and to the pitch plane.

A. Normal plane B. Pitch plane
C. Tangent plane D.
Transverse plane
Answer: D
9. The total width dimensions of a gear blank to the pitch plane.
A. Total face width B. Effective face width
C. Addendum D. Transverse plane
Answer: A
10. The space between the teeth measured along the pitch circle.
A. Tooth space B. Tooth thickness
C. Backlash D. Tooth face
Answer: A

11. A metal characteristic that withstands forces that causes

twisting.
A. Torsional strength B. Modulus of elasticity

C. Twisting moment D. Elasticity

Answer: A
12. Fillet radius in machine parts is usually introduced to:
A. Improve the look of the parts
B. Reduce concentration of stress and extended life of the
parts
C. Avoid obstruction
D. Necessary to lessen casting weight
Answer: B
13. Type of bolt commonly used in the construction that is
threaded in both ends.
A. Stud bolt B. Acme threaded bolts
C. Square threaded bolts D. Hex bolts
Answer: A
14. Hydrostatic bearing is one which:
A. The lube oil is supplied under pressure
B. Lube oil is not pressurized
C. There is no lube oil
 157

D. Bearing is lightly loaded

Answer: A
15. Which of the following materials is unsuitable as a bearing.
A. Teflon B. Low carbon steel
C. Cast iron D. Nylon
Answer: B
16. Safety features that must be placed and maintained at
machine, blacksmith,
welding and foundry shop.
A. Safety goggle B. Walkway guide
C. Safety notices in markings D. All of these
Answer: C
17. The angle at the base cylinder of an involute gear, that the
tooth makes with the
gear axis.
A. Base helix angle B. Pressure angle
C. Arc of recess D. Arc of approach
Answer: A
18. A kind of thread that is generally used:
A. UNEC B. UNC
C. UNF D. UNEF
Answer: B
19. Which of the following acronyms is not generally used as
standard?
A. ASTM B. SAE
C. IPS D. AISI
Answer: C
20. What is the difference between the shaper and a planer?
A. The tool of the shaper moves while on the planer is
stationary
B. The shaper can perform slotting operation while the
planer cannot
C. The shaper handles large pieces while the planer
handles only small pieces
D. The tool of the shaper moves in reciprocating motion
while the tool in the
 158

planer moves in rotary motion

Answer: A
21. The width of tooth measured along the pitch circle.
A. Tooth space B. Tooth thickness
C. Backlash D. Tooth face
Answer: B
22. An arbitrary modification of a tooth profile whereby a small
amount of material is
removed near the tip of the gear tooth.
A. Chamfer B. Tip relief
C. Under cut D. None of these
Answer: B
23. A plane tangent to the surfaces at a point or line of contact.
A. Normal plane B. Pitch plane

C. Tangent plane D. Axial plane

Answer: C
24. A circle coinciding with or tangent to the bottoms of the tooth
spaces.
A. Addendum circle B. Pitch circle
C. Base circle D. Root circle
Answer: D
25. The angle subtended at the center of the base circle from
teeth origin of an
involute to the point of tangency of the generation from any
point on the same
involute.
A. Root angle B. Roll angle
C. Pitch Circle D. Base circle
Answer: B
26. _____ gear with teeth spaced along a straight and suitable for
straight line motion.
A. Helical B. Bevel
C. Rack D. Worm
Answer: C
 159

27. The pitch plane, axial plane and traverse plane, all intersect at
a point and mutually
perpendicular to the:
A. Principal reference plane B. Principal reference
point
C. Principal reference axis D. Principal reference
line
Answer: A
28. A device for engaging and disengaging gears.
A. Gear shift B. Gear train
C. Gear wheel D. Gear motor
Answer: A
29. For spur gear, the speed ratio is customary to limit the
reduction of:
A. 3:1 B. 4:1
C. 5:1 D. 6:1
Answer: D
30. For helical and herringbone gears, the speed ratio is limited to:
A. 3:1 B. 5:1
C. 6:1 D. 10:1
Answer: D
31. The path of contact involute gears where the force/power is
actually transmitted.
It is a straight imaginary line passing through the pitch point
and tangent to the
base circle.
A. Principal reference plane B. Pitch point
C. Front angle D. Line of action
Answer: D
32. The hardness of helical and herringbone gear teeth after heat
treatment is 2010 to
300 Brinell hardness, for gear and pinion is at:
A. 360 Brinell min. B. 400 Brinell max.
C. 340 – 350 normal D. All of these
Answer: C
 160

33. A type of gear commonly used in parallel-shaft transmission

especially when a
smooth, continuous action is essential as in high speed drives
up to 12,000 fpm.
A. Bevel gear B. Herringbone gear

C. Spur gear D. Helical gear

Answer: D
34. It is used in conjunction with circular cross sectional members
to retain oil and
prevent dirt, foreign particles, moisture and to permit pressure
differential
between exterior and interior of the applied part.
A. Seal B. Gasket
C. Safety shield D. Packing
Answer: A
35. An object thrown upward will return to earth with the
magnitude of the terminal
velocity equal to:
A. Zero B. One-half the initial
velocity
C. Twice the initial velocity D. The initial velocity
Answer: D
36. A liquid metal:
A. Mercury B. Lead
C. Zinc D. Aluminum
Answer: A
37. What type of gear which can transmit power at a certain
angle?
A. Helical gear B. Worm gear

C. Bevel gear D. Herringbone gear

Answer: C
38. Type of V-belt to use in a driving pulley with speed of 360 rpm
and transmitting 5
 161

Hp.
A. Type C belts B. Type B belts
C. Type A belts D. Type D belts
Answer: B
39. The arbitrary modification by removing a small portion of a
tooth material at the
tip of the gear tooth is called:
A. Tip removal B. Tip undercut
C. Tip relief D. Pressure angle cut
Answer: C
40. The first derivative of kinetic energy with respect to velocity is:
A. Power B. Acceleration
C. Momentum D. None of these
Answer: C
41. They are cylindrical in form operate on parallel axes and have
straight teeth
parallel to the axis.
A. helical gears B. Bevel gears
C. Spur gears D. Worm gears
Answer: C
42. The design stress based upon the ultimate strength of the
material with a factor of
safety of about ______.
A. 2 B. 3
C. 4 D. 5
Answer: B
43. Safe working stresses for common gear materials operating
at very low velocities
are usually assumed to be ____ the ultimate strength.
A. One-fourth B. One-third
C. One-half D. Two-third
Answer: B
44. To avoid charring by the heat of friction, rawhide gears should
not be operated of
pitch line velocities greater than ____.
A. 2500 fpm B. 3000 fpm
 162

C. 35000 fpm D. 4000 fpm

Answer: A
45. The outside diameter of the hubs of larger gears should be
____ the bore for steel.
A. 1.5 times B. 1.6 times
C. 1.7 times D. 1.8 times
Answer: D
46. The couple diameter of the hubs of larger gears should be
_____ the bore for cast
iron.
A. 1.5 times B. 1.8 times
C. 2.0 times D. 2.5 times
Answer: C
47. Helix angles of ______ degrees are preferred for single helical
gears.
A. 10 and 18 B. 12 and 20
C. 15 and 23 D. 18 and 28
Answer: C
48. Helix angles of ____ degrees are preferred for double helical
gears.
A. 15 and 25 B. 20 and 30
C. 25 and 40 D. 30 and 45
Answer: D
49. A _____ is a spur gear of infinite diameter.
A. Hypoid B. Herringbone
C. Annular D. Rack
Answer: D
50. It is standard practice to assume that the thickness of the tooth
measured around
the pitch circle is exactly ____ of the circular pitch.
A. One-fourth B. One-half
C. One-third D. Two-third
Answer: B
51. What is the difference between brass and bronze?
A. Brass is composed of copper and zinc while bronze is
composed of copper
 163

and tin
B. Brass is composed of copper and zinc while bronze is
basically copper and
tin plus non-ferrous alloy such as manganese,
aluminum and chromium
C. Bronze is reddish in color while brass is a mixture of
copper and antimony
D. Bronze is mostly an alloy of copper and tin while brass is
a mixture of
copper and antimony
Answer: A
52. The reciprocal of the diametral pitch equivalent to the ration of
pitch diameter to
the number of teeth.
A. Lead B. Clearance
C. Module D. Involute
Answer: C
53. What is the property of a material which resists forces acting
to pull the material
apart?
A. Shear strength B. Tensile strength
C. Torsional strength D. Compressive strength
Answer: B
54. Which do not belong to foundry or metal casting shop?
A. Shake-out machine B. Molding machine
C. Coremaking D. Forging machine
Answer: A
55. The center of gravity of a solid pyramid or cone with a total
height of H is:
A. ¼ H B. 3/5 H
C. 1/3 H D. 1/3 H
Answer: A
56. The gradual chemical reaction by other substance such that
the metal is converted
to an oxide or other compounds.
A. Corrosion B. Cheaping
 164

C. Rusting D. Weathering
Answer: A
57. A material that should be avoided in constructing wood
pattern.
A. Sap wood B. Kiln dried wood
C. Heat wood D. Core portion of wood
Answer: A
58. What is the moment of inertia of a rectangle about its base?
A. bh2/6 B. bh3/3
2
C. bh /3 D. bh3/12
Answer: B
59. What is the modulus elasticity if the stress is 44,000 psi and a
unit strain of
0.00105?
A. 41.905 x 106 B. 42.300 x 106
C. 41.202 x 106 D. 43.101 x 106
Answer: A
60. Which of the following is not a structural steel class?
A. Low carbon steel B. Stainless steel
C. Medium carbon steel D. Tool and die steel
Answer: D
61. It occurs under heavy loads and in adequate lubrication.
A. Pitting B. Honing
C. Scoring D. Tooth breakage
Answer: C
62. In order to get benefit helical-gear action the face width should
be at least _____
the axial pitch.
A. Once B. Twice
C. Thrice D. Minimum
Answer: B
63. The outside diameter of the worm gear measured on the
central plane.
A. Addendum diameter B. Throat diameter
C. Pitch diameter D. Root diameter
Answer: B
 165

64. For worms mating with gears having 24 teeth or more the
____ pressure angle is
recommended.
A. 14.5 degrees B. 20 degrees
C. 22.5 degrees D. 25 degrees
Answer: B
65. The axes intersect and the teeth are curved and oblique is
called:
A. Skew bevel gears B. Straight bevel gears
C. Spiral bevel gears D. Zerol bevel gears
Answer: C
66. A type of gear of non-parallel and non-intersecting and the
teeth are straight.
A. Hypoid gears B. Skew bevel gears
C. Straight bevel gears D. Zerol bevel gears
Answer: B
67. For worm gears, Buckingham recommends face width.
A. 0.2 Dwo B. 0.3 Dwo
C. 0.4 Dwo D. 0.5 Dwo
Answer: D
68. For worm gears, circular pitch is equal to:
A. Axial pitch B. Diametral pitch
C. Normal pitch D. Traverse pitch
Answer: A
69. The service factor of heavy shock, rolling mill and rock
crushes.
A. 1.25 – 1.35 B. 1.35 – 1.50
C. 1.50 – 1.80 D. 1.75 – 2.00
Answer: D
70. Any plane perpendicular to a gear axis is called:
A. Transverse axis B. Conjugate axis
C. Plane rotation D. Axis of rotation
Answer: C
71. What happens to a drill if the operating speed is too fast?
A. Drill will crack
B. Drill will become overheated and will bend
 166

C. Drill will become overheated and will be drawn from

steel
D. Drill become very dull and wear fast
Answer: C
72. Copper and most of its alloys can be hardened by:
A. Patenting B. Cold working
C. Case hardening D. Soaking
Answer: B
73. A type of coupling that alloys slight amount of torsional angular
flexibility due to
introduction with some elastic material cylindrically wrapped
around the bolts in
the flange.
A. Simple elastic bonded coupling
B. Elastic material bushed coupling
C. Elastic material bonded coupling
D. All of these
Answer: B
74. Outstanding safety record contributes to:
A. High productivity
B. Outstanding performance that expects reward from
management
C. Confidence in foreman’s ability to perform well
D. Pride and enthusiasm to one-self
Answer: A
75. The capacity of metal to withstand load withstand breaking is:
A. Strength B. Stress
C. Elasticity D. Strain
Answer: A
76. Finding the resultant of two or more forces is called:
A. Coplanar force B. Non-coplanar forces

C. Couple D. Composition of forces

Answer: D
77. A machinery operation whereby done with the work accurately
fastened has a
 167

reciprocating (forward and backward) motion and the tool

head is stationary.
A. Shaping B. Planning
C. Turning D. Reaming
Answer: B
78. The phenomenon of continuous stretching under load even if
the stress is less than
the yield point.
A. Elasticity B. Ductility
C. Plasticity D. Creep
Answer: D
79. In a pair of gears, ______ is the plane perpendicular to the
axial plane and tangent
to the pitch surface.
A. Pitch B. Pitch plane
C. Pitch circle D. Pitch point
Answer: B
80. What type of gear is used for high speed operation?
A. Helical B. Spur
C. Bevel D. Worm
Answer: A
81. The circle containing the bottoms of the tooth spaces is called:
A. Addendum circle B. Base circle
C. Pitch circle D. Root circle
Answer: D
82. The surface between the flanks of adjacent teeth.
A. Bottom land B. Top land
C. Pitch surface D. Space width
Answer: A
83. The usual ratio of miter gear is:
A. 1:1 B. 1:2
C. 1:3 D. 1:4
Answer: A
84. The angle between an element of the face cone and its axis
equals pitch angle plus
addendum angle.
 168

A. Cutting angle B. Face angle

C. Pitch angle D. Front angle
Answer: B
85. The apex of the pitch cone.
A. Cone center B. Vertex
C. Pitch point D. Apothem
Answer: A
86. The portion of the tooth surface adjacent to the involute lying
inside a radial line
passing through an imaginary intersection of the involute and
the base circle.
A. Excessive cut B. Over cut
C. Under cut D. None of these
Answer: C
87. In spur gearing system, the preferred pressure angle is:
A. 14 – ½ deg B. 20 deg
C. 22 – ½ deg D. 25 deg
Answer: B
88. Hub length usually vary from:
A. 1.05 Ds to 1.7 Ds B. 1.25 Ds to 2 Ds
C. 1.35 Ds to 2.5 Ds D. 1.35 Ds to 3.0 Ds
Answer: B
89. The service factor for heavy shock is:
A. 1 to 1.25 B. 1.25 to 1.50
C. 1.50 to 1.75 D. 1.75 to 2.0
Answer: D
90. A gear wheel with curved teeth that mesh with a worm.
A. Worm wheel B. Rack gear
C. Spiral gear D. Herringbone gear
Answer: A
91. V-belts operate efficiently at speed of about (fpm).
A. 4500 B. 4400
C. 4200 D. 3600
Answer: A
92. Name the type of chuck commonly used for holding workpiece
in a lathe
 169

operation? Example, 3 - jaw universal chuck, 4 - jaw

independent chuck.
A. Magnetic jaw chuck B. 2-jaw independent
C. 8-jaw universal D. Combination
Answer: D
93. For a high corrosion resistant, stainless steel, what minimum
chromium content is
required?
A. 8% B. 4.3%
C. 1.1% D. 5.8%
Answer: A
94. Clearance to a new boiler installation to the existing or old
plant building should
follow a minimum clearance of ______ between top of the
boiler proper and the
ceiling as stated in the PSME code.
A. 2000 mm (max) B. 1000 mm (max)
C. 2130 mm (max) D. 2150 mm (Max)
Answer: C
95. Ordinary steel begins to lose strength and elasticity
significantly at about ______0F.
A. 900 – 10000F B. 800 – 9000F
C. 750 – 850 F
0 D. 600 – 7000F
Answer: D
96. Statement that a given body is in static equilibrium means that
the body cannot:
A. Have any type of motion B. Be acted upon by
more than one force
C. Undergo any displacement D. Have any acceleration
Answer: A
97. Most effective alloying element for reducing brittleness of steel
at very low
temperature.
A. Manganese B. Molybdenum
C. Silicon D. Nickel
Answer: D
 170

98. Normal stresses relieving temperature for cast steel.

A. 200 to 3500F B. 400 to 5000F
C. 300 to 400 0F D. 450 to 5500F
Answer: D
99. It is advised that in rubber belts application/mounting, it should
have an initial
tension of ____ inch/ply.
A. 18 to 24 B. 15 to 20
C. 12 to 15 D. 10
Answer: B
100. Non-ferrous filler metal is melted into grooves or as fillet on
the mother metal;
the base metal is not melted. This is commonly used for
joining iron based
machine parts or in repair works of some materials. It is
called:
A. Spot welding B. Braze welding

C. Brazing D. Gas welding

Answer: B

ELEMENTS 12
 171

1. The soldering material commonly applied for automobile

radiator cores and roofing
seams.
A. 15/85% tin and lead B. 50/50% tin and lead
C. 45/55% tin and lead D. 20/80% tin and lead
Answer: C
2. The flux that should be provided in soldering electrical
connection or commutator
wires as it tends to corrode the connections called:
A. Sal Ammoniac B. Zinc Chloride
C. Stearin D. Acid Fluxes
Answer: D
3. A brazed joint is ______ soldered joint.
A. Stronger than B. The same strength as
C. Three times strong as D. Weaker than
Answer: A
4. Brazing requires:
A. hard solder B. Soft solder
C. More heat D. Choices A and C
Answer: D
5. What is the reason why lead is used in solders?
A. It has a high melting point B. It has a low melting
point
C. It is cheap D. Choices B and C
Answer: D
6. The higher the melting point of the solder, the:
A. Harder the solder joint B. Softer the solder joint

C. Stronger the solder joint D. Weaker the solder joint

Answer: C
7. Special solders used for aluminum usually require:
A. Less heat B. More heat
C. The same heat as copper wire D. The same heat
as sheet metal
Answer: B
 172

8. The flux usually used for hard solder is:

A. Alum B. Barium
C. Borax D. Rosin
Answer: C
9. Soft solder melts at approximately:
A. 2500=F B. 3500F
C. 4500F D. 5500F
Answer: B
10. Soft solder is made of:
A. Copper and zinc B. Tin and copper
C. Tin and lead D. Tin and zinc
Answer: C
11. What is the common shop practice to prevent solder from
running away from
surface to be joined?
A. Surround the work with clay
B. Introduce around the work rolled wet cloth
C. Put asbestos sheeting around
D. All of these
Answer: D
12. The three-moment equation may be used to analyze.
A. Tapered column B. Continuous beam
C. Composite beam D. Axially end loaded
beam
Answer: B
13. One of the causes of spur gear tooth breakage is the
unbalanced load on one end
of the tooth that results in higher stresses than when the load
is evenly
distributed. To minimize this problem, the face width “b”
should not
be greater than the thickness (or pitch) of the tooth. In the
absence of test values,
the following can be a guide:
A. 2.5 PC <b< 4Pc B. 2.0 Pd <b< 4 Pd
C. 2.5 Pd <b, 4 Pd D. 2.0 Pd <b< 4 Pc
 173

Answer: A
14. The property that characterizes a material ability to be drawn
into a wire.
A. Ductility B. Thermal conductivity
C. Tensile strength D. Endurance limit
Answer: A
15. Deals only with the motion of bodies without reference to
forces that cause the
them.
A. Dynamics B. Kinetics
C. Statistics D. Kinematics
Answer: D
16. In shear pin or breaking pin design, we may use the data
experienced by Link-belt
for 1/8 inch to 1 inch pins and the breaking stress is ______
ksi.
A. 40 B. 55
C. 50 D. 48
Answer: C
17. Recommended best cutting angle of drill for work on steel or
cast iron is _____N
degrees.
A. 48 B. 63
C. 59 D. 50
Answer: C
18. Cold working of steel plates makes the metal ______.
A. Tougher B. More ductile
C. Harder D. More malleable
Answer: C
19. Considering a maximum safe center distance of sprockets
should be ______
pitches. Very long center distance causes catenary tension in
the chain.
A. 70 B. 80
C. 60 D. 50
Answer: B
 174

20. Hypoid gear is a special type of gear like:

A. Worm gear B. Spur gear
C. Herringbone gear D. Bevel gear
Answer: D
21. Prepared soldered paste flux is most popular but if you did not
have any, you could
use ____ as substitute.
A. Hydrochloric acid B. Nitric acid
C. Sulfuric acid D. Any of these
Answer: A
22. Hard solder is made of:
A. Copper and zinc B. Tin and copper
C. Tin and lead D. Tin and zinc
Answer: A
23. Soldered will not unite with a metal surface that has:
A. Dirt on it B. Grease on it
C. Oxidation on it D. Any of these
Answer: D
24. If muriatic acid as a flux, the soldered area must be cleaned
thoroughly afterwards
to prevent:
A. Anyone touching it from getting burned
B. Remaining acid from eating the metal
C. The acid from evaporating and the solder disintegrating
D. None of these
Answer: B
25. Sweating is the process of:
A. Soldering two different kinds of metal
B. Separating two pieces of metal that have been soldered
together
C. Tinning two surfaces, applying flux them, holding the two
together and
heating
D. None of these
Answer: C
26. A surface to be soldered should be prepared by:
 175

A. Acid cleaning the surfaces

B. Fitting the surfaces
C. Scraping the surfaces
D. Any of these
Answer: D
27. One of the most important factors that is often overlooked
when soldering is the fact that:
A. The surfaces to be soldered must be clean
B. The two surfaces to be soldered must not be the same
C. The two metals to be soldered must be the same
D. All surfaces should be dipped in acid first
Answer: A
28. When soldering, flux is used for:
A. Keeping the metal from getting too hot
B. Keeping the solder from running off the metal
C. Keeping the tip of the soldering iron and clean
D. Remove and prevent oxidation of the metals
Answer: D
29. Soldering is the process of:
A. Holding two metals together by heating
B. Joining two metals by a third soft metal that is applied in
a molten state
C. Holding two different kinds of metals together by heating
D. All of these
Answer: B
30. Brazing is used for joining:
A. Two ferrous material B. One ferrous and non-
ferrous material
C. Two non-ferrous metal D. Two non-metals
Answer: C
31. The maximum stress to which a material may be subjected
before failure occurs.
A. Ultimate strength B. Ultimate stress
C. Endurance limit D. Tensile stress
Answer: A
 176

32. A property of material which relates the lateral strain to the

longitudinal strain.
A. Stress B. Strain
C. Poisson’s ratio D. Strength
Answer: C
33. All area associated with the grade of steel except:
A. SAE 43XX B. SAE 13XX
C. SAE 10XX D. SAE 74XX
Answer: D
34. Poisson’s ratio is the ratio of:
A. Shear strain to compressive strain
B. Elastic limit to compressive strain
C. Lateral strain to longitudinal strain
D. Elastic limit to proportional limit
Answer: C
35. Which of the following is not structural class of steel?
A. Low carbon steel B. Tool and die steel
C. High chrome alloy steel D. High strength low alloy
steel
Answer: B
36. The product of a resultant of all forces acting on a body and
the time that the
resultant acts.
A. Angular impulse B. Angular momentum
C. Linear impulse D. Linear momentum
Answer: C
37. The smallest area at the point of rupture of a tensile specimen
divided by the
original area is called:
A. Percentage elongation B. Izod test
C. Charpy test D. Percentage reduction of the
area
Answer: D
38. It equalizes the energy exerted and the work done thus
preventing excessive or
sudden changes of speed.
 177

A. Flywheel B. Balance wheel

C. Flywheel pulley D. All of these
Answer: D
39. A mechanism which usually do the indexing in a machine tool.
A. Universal chuck B. Slooter
C. Dividing head D. Indexing
Answer: C
40. Metal that assists lubrication or lubricant itself.
A. Zinc B. Antimony
C. Babbitt D. Lead
Answer: C
41. What is the most commonly used flux for brazing?
A. Zinc chloride B. Zinc and tin
C. Zinc and copper D. Zinc and lead
Answer: A
42. Multi-spot welding process is also referred as _____ welding.
A. Tack B. Fillet
C. TIG D. Projection
Answer: D
43. The maximum temperature developed for oxy-hydrogen
welding is:
A. 17550C B. 19650C
0
C. 2565 C D. 34400C
Answer: B
44. The maximum temperature developed for oxy-acetylene
welding is:
A. 19650C B. 25650C
0
C. 3440 C D. 45650C
Answer: C
45. A mixture of aluminum powder and a metal oxide powder is
ignited by a special
powder in a crucible.
A. Thermit welding B. Stud welding
C. Resistance welding D. Gas welding
Answer: A
 178

46. A welding where an arc is struck between two tungsten

electrodes into which a jet
hydrogen is directed.
A. Atomic Hydrogen Welding B. Electron beam welding
C. Electro slug welding D. Flash welding
Answer: A
47. A common rule is to make the rivet hole diameter from ______
for rivets in single
or double shear.
A. 1.2 to 1.4 t B. 1.2 t to 1.4 t
C. 1.3 t to 1.6 t D. 1.4 t to 1.8 t
Answer: B
48. Fusion welding is the name frequently given to processes not
requiring pressure. It
is sometimes called:
A. Flash welding B. Seam welding
C. Spot welding D. Thermit welding
Answer: D
49. The ratio of load that will produce the allowable stress in any
part of the joint to
the load that will produce the allowable tension stress in the
unpunched plate.
A. Efficiency of the welded B. Efficiency of the joint

C. Performance factor D. Load factor

Answer: B
50. Thicker plates usually require excessive rivet sizes and for
practical reasons the
rivet diameter is made approximately.
A. 1.2 t B. 1.2 t
C. 2t D. 2 t
Answer: B
51. A system of forces in space is in equilibrium. If two unequal
and opposite collinear
forces are added, which of the following if any is true?
 179

A. Equilibrium is maintained B. Equilibrium is

destroyed
C. An unbalance moment exists D. None of these is true
Answer: A
52. It is a science of motion that can be solved in terms of scalar
or vector algebra.
A. Kinematics B. Curvilinear translation
C. Projectiles D. Acceleration
Answer: A
53. Permanent deformation or strain may occur without fracture.
A. Malleability B. Elasticity
C. Ductility D. Plasticity
Answer: D
54. The ability of a metal to be deformed considerably without
rupture is called:
A. Deceleration B. Uniform motion
C. Acceleration D. None of these
Answer: D
55. When two elastic bodies collide, which of the following laws
can be used to solve
for the resulting velocity?
A. Dalton’s law
B. Avogadro’s law
C. Conservation of energy
D. Conservation of momentum and conservation of energy
Answer: D
56. When the hole is smaller than the shaft, it will take pressure to
put the parts
together. The allowance is said to be negative and is termed.
A. Negative tolerance B. Negative allowance

C. Negative fits D. Interference of metal

Answer: D
57. Device used to measure accurately speed.
A. Speedometer B. Dial indicator
 180

C. Tachometer D. Dial gauge

Answer: C
58. If the velocity of a mass is the same all the time during which
motion takes place is
called:
A. Deceleration B. Uniform motion
C. Acceleration D. None of these
Answer: B
59. Length of contact between two mating parts in a screw and nut
threads measured
axially is called:
A. Arc of contact B. Depth of engagement
C. Length of engagement D. Axis of contact
Answer: C
60. The distance a helical gear or worm would thread along its
axis in one revolution if
it were free to move axially is called:
A. Length of action B. Length of contact
C. Land D. Lead
Answer: D
61. The process of joining metals by means of heating to a
temperature above the
recrystallization temperature or to fusion with or without the
application of
pressure.
A. Brazing B. Soldering
C. Welding D. Seaming
Answer: C
62. The process of bonding two or more pieces of metal together
by means of another
metal whose melting point is below 8000F.
A. Brazing B. Seaming
C. Soldering D. Welding
Answer: C
63. The process of joining metal parts by means of a non-ferrous
filter or alloy that
 181

melts at a temperature above 8000F.

A. Brazing B. Seaming
C. Soldering D. Welding
Answer: A
64. The process of joining metals in which the two parts are joined
by heating them
electrically to a temperature above the crystallization
temperature.
A. Flash welding B. Projection welding

C. Thermit welding D. Resistance welding

Answer: D
65. A fusion welding process in which the welding heat is obtained
from an electric arc
set up either between the base metal and one electrode or
between to electrodes.
A. Arc welding B. Gas welding
C. Fusion welding D. Spot welding
Answer: A
66. Refers to the capacity of a metal top be joined by welding in a
satisfactory manner.
A. Flame plating B. Metal spraying
C. Metallizing D. Weldability
Answer: D
67. A surfacing method of blasting particles of tungsten carbide
onto the surface of a
piece of metal.
A. Flame plating B. Metal spraying
C. Metallizing D. Powder pouring
Answer: A
68. For fusion, welding, efficiency shall be taken as equal to:
A. 80% B. 85%
C. 90% D. 95%
Answer: C
69. When the tensile strength of steel shell plates is not known it
shall be taken as:
 182

A. 379.31 N/mm2 B. 565.71 N/mm2

C. 556.17 N/mm2 D. 671.55 N/mm2
Answer: D
70. Minimum thickness for boiler plate shall be:
A. 3.56 mm B. 5.36 mm
C. 6.36 mm D. 6.56 mm
Answer: C
71. Major and minor diameters are commonly used in:
A. Screw threads B. Bolts
C. Gears D. All of these
Answer: A
72. A lathe with multiple cutting stations.
A. Turret lathe B. Engine lathe
C. Manual lathe D. None of these
Answer: A
73. The nominal diameter of the bolts is the:
A. Major diameter B. Minor diameter
C. Mean diameter D. All of these
Answer: A
74. Ratio of unit lateral deformation to the unit longitudinal
deformation.
A. Poisson’s ratio B. Strain
C. Stress D. Modulus of rigidity
Answer: A
75. For moderate speed of mating gears, the ideal ratio contact is:
A. 1.25 – 4.00 B. 1.20 – 1.45

C. 1.00 – 1.30 D. 0.35 – 1.45

Answer: A
76. A shaft to be checked for concentricity. A suitable method of
performing the check
is:
A. Bench centers and dial indicator
B. Line shaft bearing alignment
C. Observing vibration of the shafting
D. None of these
 183

Answer: A
77. A kind of thread in which the width of the thread is
approximately equal to the
depth of the thread and the space between threads are
approximately equal.
A. Square thread B. Acme thread
C. Buttress thread D. Whitworth thread
Answer: A
78. Which of the following is not used to resemble the shape of
tool bit?
A. Round nose B. Center cut
C. Square nose D. Thread cutting
Answer: B
79. Negative allowance is also called:
A. Interference of metal B. Feeler gage
C. Micrometer D. Tolerance
Answer: A
80. A property of matter which causes it to resist any change in its
motion or state of
rest.
A. Brake B. Friction
C. Inertia D. Impulse
Answer: C
81. The strength of iron rivets in single shear is:
A. 262 N/mm2 B. 303 N/mm2
C. 524 N/mm 2 D. 607 N/mm2
Answer: A
82. The strength of steel rivets in single shear is:
A. 262 N/mm2 B. 303N/mm2
C. 524 N/mm 2 D. 607 N/mm2
Answer: B
83. When the longitudinal seams are of lap riveted construction,
the minimum factor
of safety is:
A. 5 B. 6
C. 7 D. 8
 184

Answer: A
84. The maximum allowable working pressure of a non-code or
wrought iron heating
boiler of welded construction shall not exceed.
A. 0.5 bar B. 1.0 bar
C. 1.5 bar D. 2.0 bar
Answer: B
85. The ASME Boiler Code requires that the edge distance must
be not less than:
A. 1.5 d B. 2.0 d
C. 2.5 d D. 3.0 d
Answer: A
86. A method of resistance welding in which the heating and the
pressure are localized
at specified points by providing embossed or coined
projections on the pieces to be
joined.
A. Projection welding B. Flash welding
C. Sean welding D. Resistance welding
Answer: A
87. An intermittent weld, lightly done to hold the members in
position for assembly
purposes or for the principal welding.
A. Spot weld B. Tack weld
C. Butt weld D. Fillet weld
Answer: B
88. What type of welding that the hot flame and a metal rod are
used?
A. Seam welding B. Gas welding

C. Spot welding D. Resistance welding

Answer: B
89. It is used for joining members of approximately equal in cross-
section.
A. Mash welding B. Butt welding
 185

C. Upset welding D. Choices B and C

Answer: D
90. The melting point of the filler material in brazing is
approximately or above:
A. 4200F B. 6000F
0
C. 800 F D. 10000F
Answer: A
91. Separate forces which can be so combined are called:
A. Non-current forces B. Couple
C. Combined forces D. Concurrent forces
Answer: D
92. A lathe machine threading mechanism.
A. Reverse gear and lever B. Spindle gear

C. Change stud gear D. All of these

Answer: B
93. It is the difference of addendum and dedendum which is
equivalent to the whole
depth less working depth.
A. Fillet space B. Fillet radius
C. Clearance D. Bcklash
Answer: C
94. Machine tool used for laying straight lines on metal surfaces
made of sharp tool
steel is called:
A. Plain scriber B. A trammel
C. Hermaphrodite caliper D. Divider
Answer: A
95. All are associated with standard material specified except:
A. American Iron and Steel Institute
B. Society of Automotive Engineers
C. Southeast Asia Iron and Steel Institute
D. American Society for Testing Materials
Answer: C
96. The best instrument for measuring a thousand of an inch.
A. Micrometer B. Tachometer
 186

C. Caliper D. Pyrometer
Answer: A
97. Tooth width measured along the chord at the pitch circle.
A. Flank B. Face width
C. Width of space D. Chordal thickness
Answer: D
98. In the gear design, the total work load must be equally shared
by its arms. Rim
must be rigid to support these arms and also the head is
recommended for its
stiffening value. The assumption in the detailed design of rim
thickness and depth
of bead is ______ circular pitch (PC).
A. 0.65 B. 0.50
C. 0.56 D. 0.44
Answer: C
99. Alloy that improves strength of steel at high temperature
application.
A. Tungsten B. Molybdenum
C. Chromium D. All of these
Answer: D
100. A furnace used in melting ferrous metals.
A. Annealing furnace B. Tempering furnace
C. Induction furnace D. Normalizing furnace
Answer: C
 187

ELEMENTS 13

1. The _____ from which an involute tooth is generated or

developed.
A. Root circle B. Base circle
C. Pitch circle D. Dedendum circle
Answer: B
2. The angle at the base cylinder if an involute gear, that the tooth
makes with the
gear axis.
A. Helix angle B. Pressure angle
C. Lead angle D. Base helix angle
Answer: D
3. In an involute gear, _____ is the pitch on the base circle or
along the line of action.
A. Base circle B. Normal base pitch

C. Base pitch D. Pitch gear

Answer: C
4. The base pitches in the normal plane.
A. Normal pitch B. Normal base pitch

C. Axial plane D. Central plane

Answer: B
5. The base pitches in the axial plane.
A. Axial base pitch B. Axial pitch
C. Normal pitch D. Base pitch
Answer: A
6. In a worm gear, _____ is a plane perpendicular to the gear axis
and contains the
common perpendicular of the gear and the worm axis.
A. Central plane B. Normal plane
C. Axial plane D. Traverse plane
Answer: A
 188

7. The length of the chord subtended by the circular thickness arc

is called:
A. Backlash B. Face width
C. Chordal thickness D. Curve thickness
Answer: C
8. The height from the top of the tooth to the chord subtending the
circular thickness
arc.
A. Curve thickness B. Chordal thickness
C. Chordal addendum D. Chordal dedendum
Answer: C
9. The length of the arc of the pitch circle between the centers or
other corresponding
points of the adjacent teeth.
A. Circular pitch B. Diametral pitch
C. Base pitch D. Normal pitch
Answer: A
10. The smallest diameter on a gear tooth with which the mating
gear makes contact.
A. Contact ratio B. Contact diameter
C. Contact stress D. None of these
Answer: B
11. The total frictional energy that is stored in the brake parts
principally in the drum
or disk is approximately:
A. 56% up B. 90% up
C. 86% up D. 75% up
Answer: D
12. The brake capacity to absorb energy is known as:
A. Energy B. Power
C. Resistance brake D. Braking torque
Answer: D
13. A kind of braking systems such that if the brand wraps partly
around the bake
drum, and the braking action is obtained by pulling the band
tight into the wheel.
 189

A. Block brake B. Clutch

C. Band brake D. Centrifugal brake
Answer: C
14. Which of the following clutches that has a disadvantage of
heavier rotating
masses?
A. Multiple disc clutch B. Cone clutch
C. Disc clutch D. Twin clutching
Answer: A
15. Which of the following welds have been considered as
resistance weld which is
usually round in the same dorm as the electrodes that press
the sheets together.
A. Edge joints B. Spot welds
C. CIG welds D. TIG welds
Answer: B
16. A welding which consists of short lengths (2-3 in. long) of
welds with space
between as 6 inches on centers.
A. Intermittent weld B. Spot weld
C. MIG weld D. TIG weld
Answer: A
17. A welding operation that use hot flame and metal rod.
A. Gas welding B. Arc welding
C. Resistance welding D. Automatic welding
Answer: A
18. The arc is covered with a welding composition and bare
electrode wire is fed
automatically.
A. Resistance welding B. Induction welding
C. Submerged welding D. Spot welding
Answer: C
19. What is the recommended coefficient of fluctuation of
flywheels for punching,
shearing, pressing machine?
A. 0.005 – 0.1 B. 0.002 – 0.07
 190

C. 0.03 – 0.05 D. 0.01 – 0.03

Answer: A
20. The part of machine that absorbs the energy delivered by a
sharp force or blow.
A. Spring B. Anvil
C. Brakes D. Flywheel
Answer: B
21. The maximum compressive stress within the contact area
between mating gear
tooth profiles is called:
A. Bearing stress B. Contact stress
C. Ultimate stress D. Internal stress
Answer: B
22. The curve formed by the path of a point on a circle as it rolls a
straight line.
A. Trochoid B. Epicycloid
C. Hypocyclloid D. Cycloid
Answer: D
23. The circular pitch in the normal plane.
A. Circular plane B. Normal circular pitch
C. Central plane D. Circular base pitch
Answer: B
24. The strength of the arc between the two sides of a gear tooth
on the pitch circles
unless otherwise specified.
A. Face of tooth B. Circular thickness

C. Tooth profile D. Face width

Answer: B
25. The amount by which the dedendum exceeds the addendum
of the mating tooth.
A. Tolerance B. Allowance
C. Clearance D. Backlash
Answer: C
26. The smallest diameter on a gear tooth with which the mating
gear makes:
 191

A. Idler B. Pinion
C. Gear D. Central diameter
Answer: D
27. The ratio of the arc of action to the circular pitch is known as:
A. Contact ratio B. Action ratio

C. Recess ratio D. Approach ratio

Answer: A
28. The curve that satisfy the law of gearing.
A. Tooth profile B. Stub curve
C. Conjugate curve D. Involute curve
Answer: C
29. The depth of tooth space below the pitch circle or the radial
dimension between
the pitch circle and the bottom of the tooth space.
A. Addendum B. Dedendum
C. Working depth D. Whole depth
Answer: B
30. The circle that bounds the bottoms of the teeth.
A. Addendum circle B. Pitch circle
C. Base circle D. Dedendum circle
Answer: D
31. It is the friction of wheel inclination from the vertical position.
A. Camber B. Toe-in
C. Caster D. King in inclination
Answer: A
32. Which of the following is a machine takes large quantities of
raw or finished
materials and binds them with a rope or metal straps or wires
into a large package.
A. Bacher B. Bending machine
C. Baler D. Automatic screw
machine
Answer: C
33. It is the grasping of an outside workpiece in a chunk or a
jawed device in a lathe.
 192

A. Clucking B. Clamping
C. Chucking D. Clamshelling
Answer: C
34. Which of the following is a mechanical linkage or mechanism
that can turn about a
center or rotation?
A. Oscillation B. Crank
C. Coupler D. Drag link
Answer: B
35. What type of compound screw which produces a motion equal
to the difference in
motion between the two component screws.
A. Machine screw B. Tanden screw
C. Differential screw D. variable screw
Answer: C
36. Which of the following bolts provided with a hole at one end
instead of usual
head.
A. Stud bolt B. Eye bolt
C. Machine bolt D. Stove bolt
Answer: B
37. What operation generally carried out to divide the parent
coiled sheet into
narrower coils?
A. Slotting B. Squeezing
C. Squaring D. Slitting
Answer: D
38. It is the process used to form shallow, round, raised recessed
troughs of uniform
width in a straight curved or circular form.
A. Hemming B. Beading
C. Embossing D. Buldging
Answer: B
39. The process of removing excess metal from the edge of a strip
to make it suitable
 193

for drawing without wrinkling or to obtain final complicated

shape which was not
directly possible by blanking.
A. Lancing B. Slugging
C. Notching D. Trimming
Answer: C
40. Which of the following is the process of removing coarse
scratches or tool marks?
A. Polishing B. Buffing
C. Honing D. Lapping
Answer: A
41. The ratio of the number of teeth to the number of millimeters of
pitch diameter.
A. Diametral pitch B. Module
C. Circular pitch D. Base pitch
Answer: A
42. The diametral pitch circulated in the normal plane and is equal
to the pitch divided
by the cosine of helix angle.
A. Normal diametral plane B. Normal diametral pitch
C. Normal plane D. Normal axial pitch
Answer: B
43. That portion of the face width that actually comes into contact
with mating teeth,
as occasionally one member of a pair of gears may have a
greater face width than
the other is called:
A. Effective face width B. Effective tooth face
C. Effective tooth thickness D. Effective tooth flank
Answer: A
44. The actual torque of a gear set divided by its gear ratio.
A. Coefficient of performance B. Transmission ratio
C. Ratio factor D. Efficiency
Answer: D
45. When it rolls along the outer side another circle, it is called:
A. Cycloid B. Hypocycloid
 194

C. Epicycloid D. Trochoid
Answer: C
46. A gear with teeth on the outer cylindrical surface.
A. Annular gear B. External gear

C. Idler D. Spur gear

Answer: B
47. That surface of the tooth, which is between the pitch circles to
the top of the tooth
is known as _______.
A. Face width B. Tooth flank
C. Face of tooth D. Top land
Answer: C
48. The length of the teeth in axial plane.
A. Face of tooth B. Face width
C. Circular pitch D. Chordal thickness
Answer: B
49. The surface of the tooth between the pitch cylinder and the
addendum cylinder.
A. Face B. Flank
C. Top land D. Bottom land
Answer: A
50. The concave portion of the tooth profile where it joins the
bottom of the tooth
space.
A. Tooth curve B. Involute
C. Fillet radius D. Fillet curve
Answer: D
51. Which of the following ropes is galvanized and consists of 6
strands, 7 wires each
and a hemp core?
A. Reverse lay rope B. Guy rope
C. Lang lay rope D. Regular rope
Answer: B
52. It is a large lathe used for turning and boring cannons.
A. Gun lathe B. Engine lathe
 195

C. Cannon lathe D. Turret lathe

Answer: A
53. What device on a lathe machine used for carrying the
revolving spindle?
A. Head stock B. Header
C. Head suction D. None of these
Answer: A
54. The recommended means of supporting the chuck during the
mounting procedure to the lathe spindle is to use.
A. Crane B. Jack
C. Overhead D. Ratchet
Answer: D
55. Too much _____ in a flat belt operation tend to cause
excessive wear slippage and
may burn the belt.
A. Play B. Slack
C. Stiffness D. Tightness
Answer: D
56. It is a chromium steel tape in AISI-SAE designation.
A. 10XX B. 25XX
C. 50XX D. 40XX
Answer: C
57. Which of the following is not recommended for use in a driving
speed exceeding
2000 ft/min.?
A. Flat leather belt B. Herringbone gear
C. Silent sprocket D. V-belt
Answer: A
58. It is a low bearing used world wide for automobile or low
horsepower motor
applications. It is made of thin coating of over flat metal strip.
A. Babbitt B. Cadmium brass
C. Lead D. Thin
Answer: A
59. The most common useful tools to measure diameter in
machine shop operation
 196

but normally and always used with steel scale for

measurement.
A. Caliper B. Micrometer
C. Protactor D. Vernier
Answer: A
60. In impact force introduced to cause the metal to flow in a
shaped mold according
to the shape to dies made.
A. Hardness B. Spinning
C. Swaging D. Toughness
Answer: C
61. The maximum tensile stress in the gear tooth fillet.
A. Gear stress B. Contact stress
C. Fillet stress D. Fillet curve
Answer: C
62. That surface which is between the pitch circle and the bottom
land is called:
A. Flank of tooth B. Face of tooth
C. Face of width D. Fillet of tooth
Answer: A
63. The surface of the tooth between the pitch and root cylinders.
A. Fillet B. Face
C. Flank D. Bottom land
Answer: C
64. The number of teeth in the gear divided by the number of teeth
in the pinion.
A. Ratio factor B. Gear ratio
C. Transmission ratio D. None of these
Answer: B
65 The angle that a helical gear tooth makes the gear axis.
A. Helix angle B. Lead angle
C. Pressure angle D. Tooth angle
Answer: A
66. When it rolls along the inner side of another circle, it is called:
A. Cycloid B. Epicycloid
C. Hypocloid D. Trochoid
 197

Answer: C
67. The diameter of a circle coinciding with the tops of the teeth on
an internal gear.
A. Pitch diameter B. Internal diameter
C. Root diameter D. Dedendum diameter
Answer: B
68. A gear with teeth on the inner cylindrical surface.
A. Pitch gear B. Internal gear
C. Idler D. Spur gear
Answer: B
69. The curve formed by the path of a point on a straight line
called their generatrix, as
it rolls along a convex base curve.
A. Involute B. Cycloidal
C. Cycloid D. Trochoid
Answer: A
70. The top surface of the tooth.
A. Tooth face B. Tooth surfaces
C. Top land D. Tooth flank
Answer: C
71. Find the polar section modulus of a steel shafting with “D” as
the diameter.
A. πD3/16 B. πD3/32
C. πD /32
3 D. πD3/16
Answer: A
72. Forces of equal in magnitude but opposite in direction are
parallel called:
A. Acceleration B. Coplanar
C. Couple D. Non-coplanar
Answer: C
73. Composition of force at the ______ of two or more forces.
A. Combination B. Opposition
C. Resultant D. Summary
Answer: C
74. Circular pitch measured along the ________ in the circular
gear.
 198

A. Circle B. Line of action

C. Pitch center D. Pitch diameter
Answer: C
75. Stiffness is the material’s ability to ______ deformation under
stress.
A. Non-planar B. Planar
C. Resist D. Stafer
Answer: C
76. It imparts the ductility, toughness and plasticity of steel.
A. Annealing B. Materializing
C. Quenching D. Tempering
Answer: D
77. Which of the following types of wood is usually used in making
wood pattern in the foundry.
A. Dried sap wood B. Hard wood
C. Kiln dried wood D. Scrap wood
Answer: A
78. The progressive change in position of _____ is called motion.
A. Component B. Couple
C. Link D. Mass
Answer: D
79. Strain or _____ is a change in geometry/shape of the body
due to action of a force
on it.
A. Bending stress B. Deformation
C. Shear stress D. Stress
Answer: B
80. The effective face width of a helical gear divided by the axial
pitch. This is
sometimes called face overlap.
A. Angle overlap B. Axial overlap
C. Contact overlap D. Helical overlap
Answer: D
81. The surface of the gear between the fillets of adjacent teeth.
A. Space width B. Backlash
C. Bottom land D. Tooth space
 199

Answer: C
82. The distance a helical gear or worm would thread along its
axis one revolution of it
was free to move axially.
A. Lead B. Helix
C. Length of action D. Line of action
Answer: A
83. The path of contact in involute gears, it is straight line passing
through the pitch
point and the tangent to the base circles.
A. Length of action B. Line of action
C. Line of contact D. None of these
Answer: B
84. The distance on involute line of action through which the point
of contact moves
during the action of the tooth profile.
A. Length of action B. Line of action
C. Line of contact D. None of these
Answer: A
85. Te ratio of pitch diameter in millimeters to the number of teeth.
A. Addendum B. Diametral Pitch
C. Module D. None of these
Answer: C
86. A plane normal to the tooth surfaces acts a point of contact
and perpendicular to
the pitch plane.
A. Axial plane B. Central plane

C. Normal plane D. Diametral

Answer: C
87. The distance between similar equally spaced tooth surfaces in
a given direction
and along a given curve or line.
A. Module B. Pitch
C. Addendum D. Involute
Answer: B
 200

88. The angle subtended by the arc on the pitch circle equal in the
length to the
circular pitch.
A. Pitch angle B. Pressure angle
C. Helix angle D. Lead angle
Answer: A
89. Of meshing gears, _______ is the point of tangency to the
pitch circle.
A. Pitch point B. Pitch of contact
C. Pitch D. Reference point
Answer: A
90. In a pair of gears, it is the plane perpendicular to the axial
plane and tangent to the
axial plane and tangent to the pitch surfaces.
A. Normal plane B. Central plane

C. Pitch plane D. Tangent plane

Answer: C
91. For mass production of casting, it is generally cheaper to use
____ pattern for
longer life.
A. Aluminum B. Brass
C. Metal D. Wooden
Answer: C
92. It is a plane between mating teeth or the amount of which a
tooth space exceed
the thickness of an engaging tooth is called:
A. Backlash B. Clearance
C. Pitting D. Space
Answer: A
93. The forces that can be combined or called ______ component
forces.
A. Different B. Helical
C. Opposite D. Parallel
Answer: A
94. Plane of rotation is defined as plane perpendicular to a:
 201

A. Gear axis B. Gear ratio

C. Normal plane D. Pitch diameter
Answer: A
95. Which of the following can be a concurrent?
A. Collinear B. Couple
C. Parallel D. All of these
Answer: A
96. Cutting lubricant used in drilling reaming and taping for brass
and bronze.
A. Dry B. Soda water
C. Soluble oil D. Turpentine
Answer: A
97. The general accepted limit of diamond wheel speed should be
in the range of
_____ fpm.
A. 1000/2000 B. 2500/3500
C. 3000/4000 D. 5000/6000
Answer: D
98. Prepared tool bit will now consist of face, nose and _______.
A. Cutting tool B. Shank
C. Sharp tool D. Tool edge
Answer: B
99. This is an alloy in bronze casting that assists lubrication and in
itself a lubricant.
A. Lead B. Manganese

C. Phosphorus D. Tin
Answer: A
100. For longer sprocket chain life, the speed range of _____ fpm
is recommended.
A. 1200 – 1400 B. 1500 – 1600
C. 1800 – 2000 D. 2000 – 2100
Answer: A

ELEMENTS 14
 202

1. The rule of thumb in journal bearing design, the clearance

ratio/clearance should
be:
A. 0.01001 B. 0.0101
C. 0.0110 D. 0.0010
Answer: D
2. Also called eccentrically loaded bearing.
A. Full Bearing B. Offset Bearing
C. Partial Bearing D. Fitted Bearing
Answer: B
3. What type of bearing which totally encloses the shaft?
A. Offset Bearing B. Central Bearing
C. Babbitt Bearing D. Full Bearing
Answer: D
4. All are functions of lubricating oil except:
A. Adhesion B. Corrosion Prevention
C. Act as a Coolant D. To tighten the load
Answer: A
5. It is considered semi-solid lubricant.
A. Lube Oil B. Graphite
C. Grease D. All of these
Answer: C
6. Metal that assists lubrication or lubricant in itself.
A. Zinc B. Antimony
C. Babbitt D. Lead
Answer: C
7. Which of the following materials is unsuitable as a bearing?
A. Teflon B. Low Carbon Steel
C. Cast Iron D. Nylon
Answer: B
8. Hydrostatic bearing is one in which:
A. The lube oil is supplied under pressure
B. Lube oil is not pressurized
C. There is no lube oil
D. Bearing is lightly loaded
Answer: A
 203

9. Have the same thermal and minimum film, thickness limitation

as sleeve bearing.
A. Ball Bearing B. Roller Bearing
C. Thrust Bearing D. Oil Bearing
Answer: D
10. Fluid film desired between two surfaces having relatively
sliding motion is known
as:
A. Lube Oil B. Graphite
C. Packing D. Lubrication
Answer: D
11. All stainless steel type is SAE designation except:
A. 92XX B. 300XX
C. 304XX D. 515XX
Answer: A
12. It is white metal with good oxidation and corrosion resistance.
This has also good
electrical magnetic properties.
A. Aluminum B. Copper
C. Nickel D. Titanium
Answer: C
13. It is a molybdenum steel-tape in SIAI-SAE designation.
A. 44XX B. 45XX
C. 50XX D. 51XX
Answer: A
14. Cutting lubricants used in drilling reaming and tapping for hard
stops in cast iron.
A. Dry B. Kerosene
C. Soda water D. Turpentine
Answer: A
15. In a ____ design, the lead of a single thread is equal to the
pitch.
A. Bevel gear B. Bolt
C. Helical gear D. Hypoid gear
Answer: B
 204

16. A type of chisel used in cutting of keyways, square corners or

slots.
A. Cape B. Diamond head
C. Flat D. Round
Answer: A
17. The maximum recommended ideal number of teeth to use for
bigger sprocket is:
A. 120 B. 127
C. 132 D. 143
Answer: A
18. A bolt for general application that posses a stronger thread is
a type of ____ screw.
A. BUN B. UNC
C. UNEF D. WOOD
Answer: B
19. Maximum moment formula for beam simply supported at both
ends and subject
to a load uniformly distributed over its length.
A. wL/2 B. wL2/8
C. wL2/16 D. wL/12
Answer: B
20. What is the special bearing used with high deflection?
A. Babbitt B. Ball
C. Roller D. Self-aligning
Answer: D
21. Journal bearing composed of two principal parts, namely the:
A. Bearing and journal B. Clearance and fitted
C. Shaft and Babbitt D. Shaft and Cylinder
Answer: A
22. When the line of action of the load bisects the arc of partial
bearing, it is said to
be:
A. Eccentrically loaded B. Fit loaded
C. Centrally loaded D. Surface loaded
Answer: C
23. It is the difference in the radii of the bearing and the journal.
 205

A. Even clearance B. Clearance ratio

C. Fit clearance D. Radial clearance
Answer: D
24. It is one in which the radii of the journal and the bearing are
the same.
A. Clearance bearing B. Fitted bearing
C. Full bearing D. Partial bearing
Answer: B
25. The line that passes through centers of the bearing and the
journal is called the:
A. Line of action B. Line of centers
C. Line of tangent D. Under cut
Answer: B
26. Length-diameter ratio was a good compromise for the general
case of
hydrodynamic bearings. It is approximately equal to:
A. 1 B. 2
C. 3 D. 4
Answer: A
27. Operating temperature of oil film ranges _______ or less.
A. 1200F to 1900F B. 1300F to 1600F
C. 1400F to 1500F D. 1400F to 1600F
Answer: D
28. At higher temperature, the oil oxides more rapidly above:
A. 1200F B. 1400F
C. 160 F0 D. 2000F
Answer: D
29. A conclusion repeatedly verified by experiment is _____ that
the smoother the
surface.
A. Constant
B. The greater the load capacity of the bearing
C. None of these
D. Variable
Answer: B
 206

30. Which of the following is considered an advantage for bearing

materials?
A. Conformability B. Embeddability
C. Compatibility D. All of these
Answer: D
31. Which of the following bearing is used for low load and less
expensive production?
A. Babbitt B. Ball bearing
C. Roller bearing D. Self aligning
Answer: B
32. The lateral strain in axial tension members can be calculated
by:
A. Deformation B. Hooke’s law
C. Poisson’s ratio D. Willan’s line
Answer: B
33. It is abundantly used worldwide as coating on top of the plate
of automobiles.
A. Babbitt B. Lead
C. Manganese D. Tin
Answer: B
34. A liquid metal at room temperature.
A. Aluminum B. Mercury
C. Zinc D. Zirconium
Answer: B
35. It is a steel with SAE specification 13XX.
A. Chromium B. Manganese
C. Molybdenum D. Nickel
Answer: B
36. Property, which enables a material to be drawn into a wire.
A. Ductility B. Elasticity
C. Plasticity D. Utility
Answer: A
37. The stress that causes the material to shorten.
A. Bearing B. Compressive
C. Shear D. Tensile
Answer: B
 207

38. The most known lubricants being utilized in whatever category

of load and speed
are oil, air, grease and dry lubricants like:
A. Bronze B. Graphite
C. Lead D. Silicon
Answer: B
39. It is a gear commonly used in parallel shaft transmission
especially when a smooth
continuous action is essential as in high speed drives up to
12,000 fpm.
A. Bevel gear B. Helical gear
C. Herringbone gear D. Spur gear
Answer: C
40. The reciprocal of a diametral pitch or the ratio of the pitch
diameter to the number
of teeth.
A. Clearance B. Involute
C. Lead D. Module
Answer: D
41. For thrust bearing, the speed at moderate operating conditions
is:
A. 50<Vm>200 fpm B. 50<Vm>220 fpm
C. 50<Vm>250 fpm D. 50<Vm>290 fpm
Answer: A
42. The 200 series bearing is called:
A. Heavy B. Light
C. Medium D. None of these
Answer: B
43. The 300 series bearing is called:
A. Heavy B. Light
C. Medium D. All of these
Answer: C
44. A type of roller bearing in which the balls are assembled by
the eccentric displacement of the inner ring.
A. Shallow-groove ball bearing B. Self-aligning ball
bearing
 208

C. Filling-slot ball bearing D. Deep-groove

ball bearing
Answer: D
45. Which of the following is not a type of ball bearing?
A. Shallow-groove ball bearing B. Self-aligning ball
bearing
C. Fillet-slot ball bearing D. Deep-groove ball
bearing
Answer: A
46. Steel balls for ball bearings are manufactured by:
A. Casting B. Cold heading
C. Rolling D. Turning
Answer: B
47. In hydrodynamic bearings:
A. The oil film pressure generated only by the rotation of
the journal
B. the oil film is maintained by supplying oil under pressure
C. Do not need external supply of lubricant
D. Grease is used for lubrication
Answer: A
48. If P = bearing pressure on projected bearing area, Z =
absolute viscosity of
lubricant and N = speed of journal, then the bearing
characteristic number is given
by:
A. ZN / P B. Z / PN
C. ZP / N D. P /ZN
Answer: A
49. The rated life of a bearing changes:
A. Directly as load B. Inversely as fourth power of
load
C. Inversely as cube of load D. Inversely as square of
load
Answer: C
50. In oiless bearing:
 209

A. The oil film pressure is produced only by the rotation of

the journal
B. The oil film is maintained by supplying oil under pressure
C. Do not need external supply of lubricant
D. Grease is needed to be applied after some intervals
Answer: C
51. What tool(s) will be used in making wood pattern in the
foundry shop?
A. band saw B. Drill machine
C. Hammer D. Saw and chisel
Answer: D
52. Type of bolt commonly used in the construction that is
threaded in both ends.
A. Acme threaded bolts B. Hex bolt
C. Square threaded D. Stud bolt
Answer: D
53. Ability of a material to absorb strain energy and will return to
its original state.
A. Creep B. Fatigue strength
C. hardness D. Resilience
Answer: D
54. The ratio of lateral strain to longitudinal strain.
A. Deformation B. Modulus of elasticity

C. Poisson’s ratio D. Willan’s line

Answer: C
55. Basic size is the same as design size if there is no:
A. Allowance B. Clearance
C. Limits D. Tolerance
Answer: A
56. Forces that meet at a common point are called:
A. Co-linear B. Concurrent
C. Coplanar D. Couple
Answer: B
57. A pair of equal and opposite (not collinear) forces that tend to
cause a rotation of a
 210

body.
A. Centroids B. Couple
C. Equilibrium D. Vector
Answer: B
58. Stress that resist being pulled apart.
A. Compressive B. Shear
C. Tensile D. Torsional
Answer: C
59. What is the other term applied to dynamic seals?
A. Gasket B. Packing
C. Seal D. Shield
Answer: B
60. Which type of hardening will work to some extent in all
metals?
A. Annealing B. Austenitizing
C. Martempering D. Work hardening
Answer: D
61. A shaft rotating in anticlockwise direction at slow speed inside
a bearing will be:
A. At bottom most of bearing
B. Towards left side of bearing and making metal to metal
contact
C. Towards left side of bearing and making no metal to
metal contact
D. Towards right side of bearing and making no metal to
metal contact
Answer: B
62. A machine part that supports another part, which rotates,
slides or oscillates in or
on it.
A. Journal B. Bearing
C. Roller D. Casing
Answer: B
63. The part of a shaft or crank, which is supported by and in
bearing.
A. Casing B. Bushing
 211

C. Roller D. Journal
Answer: D
64. It is also called anti-friction bearing.
A. Rolling bearing B. Thrust bearing
C. Tapered bearing D. Single row bearing
Answer: A
65. Which of the following is a bearing material?
A. Babbitt B. Bronze
C. Plastics D. All of these
Answer: D
66. It acts toward the center of the bearing along a radius.
A. Thrust load B. Tangential load
C. Radial load D. Peripheral load
Answer: C
67. Conrad bearing is also known as:
A. Needle bearing B. Ball bearing
C. Roller bearing D. Tapered bearing
Answer: B
68. The combined effect of many of the variables involved in the
operation of a
bearing under hydrodynamic lubrication can be characterized
by the
dimensionless number called:
A. Reynolds Number B. Prandtl Number
C. Grashof Number D. Sommerfeld Number
Answer: D
69. It exists primarily to guide the motion of a machine member
without specific
regard to the direction of load application.
A. Radial bearing B. Journal bearing
C. Thrust bearing D. Guide bearing
Answer: D
70. It carries a load collinear to the axis of possible rotation of the
supported member.
A. Guide bearing B. Journal bearing
C. Thrust bearing D. Radial bearing
 212

Answer: C
71. What do impact tests determine?
A. Creep strength B. Hardness
C. Toughness D. Yield strength
Answer: C
72. Sound travels fastest in:
A. Air at 00F and 1 atmosphere B. Air at 700F and 1
atmosphere
C. Air at 700F and 0 lbf/in2 D. Steel at 700F
Answer: D
73. The yield strength of common yellow brass (70% Cu, 30% Zn)
can be increased by:
A. Annealing B. Chill casting
C. Cold working D. Heat treatment
Answer: C
74. How do you call the forces not lie on the same plane?
A. Component B. Composition of forces

C. Non-coplanar D. Resolution
Answer: C
75. The distance between the center of oscillation and the point of
suspension is
called:
A. Fix axis B. Center of gravity
C. Center of percussion D. Radius of oscillation
Answer: D
76. If the velocity is variable and regular/constantly increasing the
rate of change is
called:
A. Acceleration B. Constant work
C. Moment D. Motion
Answer: A
77. The kinematics chain in which one link is considered fixed for
the purpose of
analysis but motion is possible in other links.
A. Belting B. Frame
 213

C. Mechanism D. Sprocket chain

Answer: B
78. All forces in the same plane are called;
A. Coplanar B. Couple
C. Parallel D. Resultant
Answer: A
79. The _____ is one of the right members/bodies joined together
to form a kinematic
chain.
A. Coplanar B. Frame
C. Link D. Machine
Answer: C
80. The resultant of a pair of equal forces but opposite in direction
is called:
A. Concurrent B. Couple
C. Non-concurrent D. Resultant
Answer: B
81. The 400 series bearing is called:
A. Light B. Medium
C. Heavy D. Extra heavy
Answer: C
82. The product of length and diameter of the bearing is called:
A. Shearing area B. Compressive area

C. Projected area D. Cross-sectional area

Answer: C
83. If the length over diameter of the bearing is unity, it is known
as:
A. Long bearing B. Short bearing
C. Medium bearing D. Square bearing
Answer: D
84. A bearing in which the length ratio length/diameter is greater
than 1.
A. Short bearings B. Long bearings
C. Square bearings D. Medium bearings
Answer: B
 214

85. The product of absolute viscosity and rotational speed divided

by the unit loading.
A. Section modulus B. Bearing modulus
C. Shear modulus D. None of these
Answer: B
86. Measured from the line of radial loading on the bearing to the
position of the
minimum oil-film thickness.
A. Attitude angle B. Latitude angle
C. Longitude angle D. Altitude angle
Answer:
87. The radial distance between the center of the bearing and the
displacement center
of the journal is called:
A. Concentricity B. Eccentricity
C. Embeddability D. None of these
Answer: B
88. Which of the following is an example of solid lubricant?
A. Molybdenum disulfide B. Graphite
C. Tungsten disulfide D. All of these
Answer: D
89. The length ratio L/D typically varies between:
A. 0.1 to 0.5 B. 0.2 to 0.6
C. 0.2 to 0.8 D. 0.25 to 1.0
Answer: D
90. The operating temperature of the Babbitt is limited to:
A. 2000F B. 3000F
C. 400 F0 D. 5000F
Answer: B
91. The helical and herringbone gear teeth cut after heat
treatment should have a
hardness in the range of 210/300BHN. The pinion gear teeth
hardness on the
other hand, ideally/normally should be at _____BHN.
A. 250/320 B. 350/380
C. 400/345 D. 340/350
 215

Answer: D
92. As a rule center to center distance between sprocket should
not be less than ____
times the diameter of the bigger sprocket and not less than 30
times the pitch nor
more than about 50 times to pitch.
A. 1.5 B. 2
C. 2.5 D. 3
Answer: A
93. What is the carbon content range of SAE 4140 chrome-moly
steel after heat
treatment.
A. 0.30/0.45 B. 0.38/0.43
C. 0.38/0.45 D. 0.30/0.50
Answer: B
94. Gears are manufactured usually in the following processes:
milling, generating,
shaving, grinding and:
A. Blanking B. Dinking
C. Heat treatment D. Molding
Answer: A
95. Flat belt that is too tight will induced strain on the bearing and
belt ______.
A. Life will be shortened B. Result to
uneconomical operation
C. Suffer/shatter D. Will be sheared/cut
Answer: A
96. The resulting cross-sectional area of the tensile test specimen
original area is
called:
A. Charpy test B. % elongation
C. Impact test D. Izod test
Answer: B
97. SAE 51XXX belongs to the _____ steel family.
A. Carbon B. Chromium
C. Manganese D. Nickel
 216

Answer: B
98. Which of the following gasket material which should avoid hot
liquid/steam
applications?
A. Asbestos fiber B. Nylon fiber
C. Rubberized D. Wool
Answer: C
99. Which of the following that describes the same material
properties all
over/direction and at any particular point in a structural
member?
Answer: D
A. Heterogeneous B. Homogeneous
C. Isentropic D. Isotropic
100. Arc produced by two tungsten electrodes into which a jet of
hydrogen is directed.
A. Atomic hydrogen welding B. Electro-beam welding
C. Hydrogen bomb D. Hydrogen lancing
Answer: A

ELEMENTS 15

1. Helical gears mounted on non-parallel shafts are called

________.
A. Open gear B. Crossed helical gear
C. Closed helical gear D. Herringbone gear
Answer: B
2. _____ is used to connect intersecting shafts, usually but not
necessarily at 90
degrees.
A. Bevel gear B. Helical gear
 217

C. Spur gear D. Worm gear

Answer: A
3. Bevel gear teeth are built with respect to a ______ rather than
to a pitch cylinder as ion spur gears.
A. Pitch pedal B. Pitch profile
C. Pitch cone D. Cylinder
Answer: C
4. Refers to the length of pitch cone in a bevel gear.
A. Cone center B. Lead
C. Center distance D. Pitch
Answer: A
5. Refers to the cone that is performed by the elements of top
lands.
A. Face cone B. Root face
C. Dial face D. Pitch face
Answer: A
6. The cone formed by the elements of bottom lands.
A. Face cone B. Root cone
C. Back cone D. Rake cone
Answer: B
7. An imaginary cone whose elements are perpendicular to the
pitch cone elements at
the large end of the tooth.
A. Front cone B. Side cone
C. Rear cone D. Back cone
Answer: D
8. ______ is one whose tooth profiles consists of straight
elements that converge to a
point at the cone center.
A. Circular bevel gear B. Straight bevel gear

C. Path bevel gear D. Herringbone gear

Answer: B
9. The desired quality in gear is:
A. Quietness B. Durability
C. Strength D. All of these
 218

Answer: D
10. Straight and zerol bevel gears should not be sued when the
pitch line velocity is
greater than:
A. 800 rpm B. 850 rpm
C. 875 rpm D. 900 rpm
Answer: D
11. A furnace used in melting non-ferrous metals.
A. Cupola furnace B. Crucible furnace
C. Induction furnace D. Tempering furnace
Answer: B
12. Endurance strength is nearly proportional to the ultimate
strength but not with:
A. Yield strength B. Design stress
C. Shear stress D. All of these
Answer: A
13. Liners are normally made of:
A. Cast iron B. Alloyed bronze
C. Alloyed steel D. Alloyed aluminum
Answer: A
14. Used in as cast condition steel casting with carbon content
less than ____ % C.
A. 0.26 B. 0.15 to 0.18
C. 0.20 D. 0.25
Answer: C
15. The yield strength of a regular yellow brass (65 to 70% Cu, 30
to 35% Zn) can be
increased/improved by:
A. Cold working B. Tempering
C. Chill casting D. Heat treatment
Answer: A
16. The purpose of these parts in application are t6o have better
bearings to seal the
guard against marring, etc.
A. Beating journal B. Metallic seal
C. Washer D. Shaft seal
 219

Answer: C
17. Metals are conductive because:
A. The electrons are loosely bound to the nuclei and
therefore mobile
B. Having characteristic metallic luster
C. They are on the left side of the periodic table
D. They have extra electrons as exhibited by normally
possible balance state
Answer: A
18. It is considered semi-solid lubricant.
A. Lube oil B. Graphite
C. Grease D. All of these
Answer: C
19. What is the common cutting fluid used for cutting metals?
A. Water with soda and borax B. Light mineral oil
C. Soluble oil D. All of these
Answer: D
20. Good stabilizer in stainless steel.
A. Columbium B. Titanium
C. Tantalum D. All of these
Answer: D
21. The spiral bevel gears are recommended when the pitch line
speed exceeds:
A. 1000 fpm B. 1100 fpm
C. 1500 fpm D. 2000 fpm
Answer: A
22. When the pitch line speed is above 800 fpm the teeth should
be:
A. Ground after hardening B. Should be cooled in air
C. Should be quenched after D. None of these
Answer: A
23. ______ have curved teeth as in spiral bevels, but with zero
angle.
A. Spiral gears B. Zerol bevel gears
C. Zero bevel gears D. Straight bevel gears
Answer: B
 220

24. ______ is a gear that has an advantage of smoother tooth

engagement quietness
of operation greater and higher permissible speeds.
A. Zerol bevel gear B. Straight bevel gear
C. Hypoid bevel gear D. Spiral bevel gear
Answer: D
25. When the pair of bevel gears of the same size is on shafts
intersecting at right
angle, they are called ____.
A. Mold gear B. Helix angle
C. Miter gear D. Tangent gear
Answer: C
26. The use of gearbox provides:
A. Gear leverage B. More torque
C. More speed D. None of these
Answer: B
27. For equalizing the rotation of two gears, a gearbox employs:
A. Dog and clutch B. Crown gear
C. Star pinion D. None of these
Answer: D
28. In an constant mesh gearbox, all the speed gears remain.
A. Separate B. Joined to their couples
C. Of the same measurements D. None of these
Answer: B
29. If a big gear is moved by a small gear then the big gear.
A. Will not rotate B. Will rotate reverse
direction
C. Will not rotate fastly D. None of these
Answer: B
30. ______ are bevel gears mounted on intersecting shafts at
angle other than 90
degrees.
A. Right angle gears B. Half gears
C. Inclined gears D. Angular gears
Answer: D
31. The good deoxidizer in steel melting.
 221

A. Manganese B. Silicon
C. Aluminum D. All of these
Answer: D
32. The usual ratio of water to soluble oil used as cutting fluid.
A. 50% water to 50% oil B. 2 water to 1 oil
C. 3 water to 1 oil D. 4 to 80 water to 1 oil
Answer: D
33. Killed steel is always associated with:
A. Silicon B. Manganese
C. Phosphorus D. Sulfur
Answer: A
34. Which of the following does not belong to the group?
A. Welding B. Soldering
C. Casting D. Brazing
Answer: C
35. Which of the following is most popular soldering of metal?
A. 10 / 80 B. 45 / 55
C. 50 / 50 D. 60 / 40
Answer: C
36. The motion of an object diminished /decreased speed.
A. Deceleration B. Retarded motion
C. Negative impulse D. All of these
Answer: B
37. It is recommended not to have a direct drive and drive
sprockets if the ratio of
their teeth exceeds _____, use two or more step combination.
A. 10 times B. 8 times
C. 5 times D. 6 times
Answer: B
38. It is used to change rotary motion to reciprocating motion.
A. Helical gear B. Rack gear
C. Worm gear D. Spur gear
Answer: B
39. Stresses that are independent loads.
A. Working stress B. Operating stress
C. Residual stress D. Shear stress
 222

Answer: C
40. The distance of the tooth, which is equal to the sum of the
addendum and
dedendum.
A. Full depth B. Whole depth
C. Working depth D. Dedendum
Answer: B
41. The pitch angle is 90 degrees that is, the pitch has become a
plane.
A. Atten gear B. Crown gear
C. Cool gear D. Hiphap gear
Answer: B
42. _____ is used to transmit power between non-intersecting
shafts, nearly always at
right angle to each other.
A. Spur gear B. Ordinary gear
C. Bevel gear D. Worm gear
Answer: D
43. What are the two types of construction for the worm?
A. Shell and cylindrical B. Shell and zigzag
C. Shell and Integral D. Tube and integral
Answer: C
44. The standard pressure angle for fine pitch gears is _____
degrees and is
recommended for most applications.
A. 14.5 degrees B. 16 degrees
C. 20 degrees D. 21 degrees
Answer: C
45. The contact ratio of a pair of mating spur gears must be well
over _____ to insure a
smooth transfer of load from one pair of teeth to the next pair.
A. 1.0 B. 2.0
C. 3.0 D. 4.0
Answer: A
46. As general rule contact ratio should not be less than:
A. 1:1 B. 1:2
 223

C. 1:3 D. 1:4
Answer: D
47. Surface roughness on active profile surfaces on gear is about
_____ pitch.
A. 30 B. 32
C. 34 D. 36
Answer: B
48. Tooth breakage on gear is usually:
A. A tensile fatigue B. A contact stress
C. A crack D. None of these
Answer: A
49. AGMA means:
A. American German Manufacturer Association
B. Athletic Gear Main Association
C. American Gear Metal Association
D. American Gear Manufacturer Association
Answer: D
50. Which of the following does not belong to the group?
A. Tooth scoring B. Tooth breakage
C. Pitting D. Toughing
Answer: D
51. The concave portion of the tooth profile where it joints the
bottom of the tooth
space.
A. Fillet curve B. Fillet radius
C. Bottom depth D. Fillet
Answer: A
52. In gear design, the ratio of the pitch diameter in inches to the
number of teeth.
A. Module B. Diametral pitch
C. English module D. Circular pitch
Answer: C
53. It is recommended for high speed application that the
minimum number of teeth in small sprocket should be:
A. 26 to 30 B. 12 to 16
C. 26 to 28 D. 18 to 24
 224

Answer: D
54. Continuous stretching under load even if the stress is less
than the yield point.
A. Plasticity B. Elasticity
C. Creep D. Ductility
Answer: C
55. Which of the following is not a structural class of steel?
A. High speed steel B. Tool and die
C. Low carbon D. High carbon
Answer: B
56. Opposite direction parallel forces.
A. Concurrent B. Coplanar
C. Couple D. Non-coplanar
Answer: C
57. The ratio of the moment of inertia of the cross-section of the
beam to the section
modulus.
A. Equal to the radius of gyration
B. Equal to the area of the cross-section
C. Measure of a distance
D. Dependent on the modulus of elasticity
Answer: C
58. Gear used to transmit power at high velocity ratios between
non-intersecting
shafts that are usually but not necessarily at right angle.
A. Helical gear B. Bevel gear
C. Worm gear D. Spiral gear
Answer: C
59. Which of the following is the differential of the shear equation?
A. Bending moment of the beam B. Tensile strength of the
beam
C. Slope of the elastic curve D. Load of the beam
Answer: D
60. It is arbitrarily defined as the push and pull.
A. Force B. Work
C. Inertia D. Power
 225

Answer: A
61. Well proportion commercial gears with a pitch line velocity of
less than ______ will
normally not score if they have a reasonably good surface
finish and are properly
lubricated.
A. 6000 fpm B. 6500 fpm
C. 7000 fpm D. 8000 fpm
Answer: C
62. Experimental data from actual gear unit measurements are
seldom repeatable
within a plus or minus _____ band.
A. 5% B. 10%
C. 15% D. 20%
Answer: B
63. Pitting is a function of the Hertzian contact stresses between
two cylinders and is
proportioned to the square root of the _____.
A. Applied load B. The contact stress
C. The stress D. Impact
Answer: A
64. When an excitation frequency coincides with a natural
frequency, this is known to
be:
A. Unity B. Resonance

C. Obliquity D. Sinusoidal
Answer: B
65. The average tooth stiffness constant of face is usually:
A. 1.5 to 2 psi B. 3 to 6 psi
C. 3 to 4 psi D. 7.5 to 10 psi
Answer: A
66. When the number of teeth in a pair of meshing gears are such
that they do not
have a common divisor.
A. Dummy B. LCD
 226

C. Add it D. Hunting
Answer: D
67. For internal gears having a 20 degree pressure angle and full
depth teeth, the
difference between the number of teeth in a gear and pinion
should not be less
than ______.
A. 10 B. 12
C. 14 D. 16
Answer: B
68. Zerol bevel gears angle should have a pinion either no less
than:
A. 15 teeth B. 16 teeth
C. 17 teeth D. 18 teeth
Answer: C
69. _______ are machine elements that transmit motion by
means of successively
engaging teeth.
A. Sprockets B. Gears
C. Tooth belt D. Annular
Answer: B
70. Arc of the pitch circle through which a tooth travels from the
first point and
contact with the mating tooth to the pitch point is called:
A. Arc of contact B. Arc of approach
C. Arc of recess D. Arc of action
Answer: D
71. The changes in shape or geometry of the body due action of a
force on it is called
deformation or:
A. Shear stress B. Stresses
C. Compressive stress D. Strains
Answer: D
72. For evenly distributed and uniform wear on each meshing gear
tooth, the ideal
design practice is to consider a:
 227

A. Wear resistance alloy addition to tooth gear

B. Heat treatment of the gears
C. Hardening of each tooth
D. Hunting tooth addition
Answer: D
73. The reciprocal of a diametral pitch or the ratio of pitch
diameter to number of
teeth.
A. Lead B. Module
C. Involute D. Clearance
Answer: B
74. It is the ability of the material to resist deformation under
stress.
A. Plasticity B. Stiffness
C. Toughness D. All of these
Answer: B
75. Flat leather belting not recommended for use in speed excess
of _____ fpm.
A. 3600 B. 4800
C. 6000 D. All of these
Answer: C
76. The angle included between the sides of the thread measured
in an axial plane in a
screw thread.
A. Angle of thread B. Angle between thread
C. Helix angle thread D. Half angle thread or
20 0

Answer: A
77. The property of a material that relates the lateral strain to
longitudinal strain.
A. Stress B. Strain
C. Poisson’s ratio D. Endurance limit
Answer: C
78. Eccentrically loaded bearing is also called:
A. Full bearing B. Offset bearing
C. Partial bearing D. Fitted bearing
 228

Answer: B
79. In the selection of wire rope, regular lay means wires and
strands are arranged in
the following manner.
A. Twisted in same direction B. Twisted in any
direction
C. Twisted in opposite direction D. Twisted in along
direction
Answer: C
80. In involute teeth, the pressure angle is often defined as the
angle between the line
of action and the line of tangent to the pitch circle. It is also
termed as:
A. Helix angle B. Angle of recess
C. Angle of obliquity D. Arc of action
Answer: C
81. Height of tooth above pitch circle or the distance between the
pitch circle and the
top of the tooth is called:
A. Dedendum B. Addendum
C. Working depth D. Total depth
Answer: B
82. The circle that bounds the outer ends of the teeth.
A. Addendum circle B. Dedendum circle
C. Pitch circle D. Root circle
Answer: A
83. The angle through which the gear turns from the time a given
pair of teeth are in
contact at the pitch point until they pass out the mesh.
A. Pressure angle B. Angle of action
C. Angle of approach D. Angle of recess
Answer: B
84. The angle through which the gear turns from the time a
particular pair of teeth
comes into in contact until they go out the contact.
A. Pressure angle B. Angle of action
 229

C. Angle of approach D. Angle of recess

Answer: B
85. The angle through which the gear turns from the time a
particular pair of teeth
come into in contact until they are in contact at the pitch point.

A. Pressure angle B. Angle of action

C. Angle of approach D. Angle of recess
Answer: C
86. Arc of the circle through which a tooth travels from the point of
contact with the
mating tooth to the pitch point is called:
A. Arc of contact B. Arc of approach
C. Arc of recess D. Arc of action
Answer: B
87. The ratio of the arc of approach to the arc of action.
A. Approach ratio B. Action ratio

C. Recess ratio D. Contact ratio

Answer: A
88. In a pair of gear, it is the plane that contains the two axes in a
simple gear, it may
be any plane containing the axes and the given point.
A. Axial plane B. Central plane
C. Normal plane D. Transverse plane
Answer: A
89. Arc of the pitch circle which a tooth travels from its contact
with the mating tooth
at the pitch point to the point where the contact ceases is
called:
A. Arc of Contact B. Arc of Approach
C. Arc of Recess D. Arc of Action
Answer: C
90. A single ply leather belt running at a belt velocity of 300ft/min
is likely to transmit
_____ per inch of width.
 230

A. 2.5 hp B. 3.0 hp
C. 4.0 hp D. 5.0 hp
Answer: C
91. Height of tooth above pitch circle or radial distance between
pitch circle and top
land of the tooth.
A. Top tooth B. Addendum
C. Land D. Hunting tooth
Answer: B
92. The function of clutch in the machine tools is:
A. Lowering the drive
B. Alignment of drive shaft
C. To disconnect or connect at will the drive
D. To insure that two shafts line up at high speed
Answer: C
93. The amount by which the width of a tooth space exceeds the
thickness of the
engaging tooth on the pitch circles.
A. Backlash B. Clearance
C. Undercut D. Chordal thickness
Answer: A
94. Which does not belong to the group?
A. SAE B. AISI
C. SEA II D. ASTM
Answer: C
95. What is the SAE specification number of molybdenum?
A. SAE 2XXX B. SAE 3XXX
C. SAE 4XXX D. SAE 5XXX
Answer: C
96. What will be the effect in bushing gears without backlash?
A. Jamming B. Overheating
C. Overload D. All of these
Answer: D
97. Range of helix angle on helical gear.
A. Less than 18 B. 15 – 25
C. 20 – 35 D. 35 – 40
 231

Answer: B
98. The distance a helical gear or worm would thread along its
axis in one revolution if
it were free to move axially.
A. Lead B. Thread
C. Pitch D. Land
Answer: A
99. It refers to the surface of the gear between the fillets of
adjacent teeth.
A. Top land B. Bottom land
C. Pitch D. Fillet
Answer: B
100. The distance between adjacent rivets is called.
A. Pitch B. Crest
C. Lead D. None of these
Answer: A
 232

ELEMENTS 16

1. A heavy rotating body which serves as a reservoir for absorbing

and redistributing
kinetic energy.
A. Gears B. Brakes
C. Flywheel D. Fan
Answer: C
2. Which of the following is not a use of spring?
A. Absorbs energy B. Measure weight
C. Source of energy in clocks D. Measure the thickness
Answer: D
3. The ratio of mean diameter of coil to the coil diameter.
A. Wahl factor B. Diameter ratio
C. Spring index D. Lead angle
Answer: C
4. The overall length of the spring when it is compressed until all
adjacent coils
touched.
A. Compressed length B. Free length
C. Solid length D. None of these
Answer: C
5. The length of coil spring under no load.
A. Compressed length B. Free length
C. Solid height D. None of these
Answer: B
6. In general, steel springs are made of relatively high carbon
usually:
A. More than 0.5% B. 5%
C. Less than 0.5% D. 10%
Answer: A
 233

7. When heat treated wire is coiled cold, it should be stress

relieved for bending stresses after cooling by being at some at
what temperature?
A. 4000F B. 5000F
C. 6000F D. 7000F
Answer: B
8. A low cost spring material, suitable where service is not severe
and dimensional precision is not needed.
A. Hard drawn wire spring B. Helical spring
C. Stainless steel D. Helical tension spring
wire
Answer: A
9. A hard drawn also 80% reduction but it is made of high-grade
steel
A. Music wire B. Oil tempered wire

C. Song wire D. Chromium silicon wire

Answer: A
10. A spring wire with good quality for impact loads at moderately
high temperature.
A. Hard drawn wire spring B. Helical spring wire
C. Chromium-silicon D. Helical tension spring
wire
Answer: C
11. A plane perpendicular to the axial plane and to the pitch plane.
In gears with
parallel axis, the transverse plane and the plane of rotation
coincide.
A. Transverse plane B. Principal reference plane

C. Normal plane D. Pitch plane

Answer: A
12. What tool will be used in making wood pattern in the foundry
shop?
A. Band saw B. Drill machine
C. Saw and chisel D. Hammer
 234

Answer: C
13. All are functions of lubricating oil, EXCEPT:
A. Adhesion B. Corrosion prevention
C. Act as coolant D. To lighten the load
Answer: A
14. What type of bearing which totally encloses the shaft?
A. Offset bearing B. Central bearing
C. Babbitt bearing D. Full bearing
Answer: D
15. Not adaptable to welding due to strength and poor ductility.
A. Copper parts B. Aluminum parts
C. Cast iron parts D. All of these
Answer: B
16. In general, the design stress and factor of safety are related as
follows:
A. Design stress = ultimate stress times factor of safety
B. Design stress = ultimate stress divided by factor of
safety
C. Factor of safety = design stress divided by ultimate
stress
D. Ultimate stress = factor of safety divided by design
stress
Answer: B
17. The color of pipe for communication is:
A. White B. Blue
C. Yellow D. Orange
Answer: A
18. It improves red hardness of steel.
A. Chromium B. Cobalt
C. Boron D. Lead
Answer: B
19. A metal which has a high electrical conductivity but should not
be used for high temperature metal.
A. Silicon B. Zinc
C. Chrome alloy D. Carbide
Answer: B
 235

20. Finding the resultant of two or more forces is called:

A. Co-planar forces B. Non-coplanar forces
C. Couple D. Composition of forces
Answer: D
21. A type of coil where the helical coil is wrapped into a circle
forming an annular
ring.
A. Volute spring B. Motor spring
C. Hair spring D. Garter spring
Answer: D
22. A type of spring where thin flat strip wound up on itself as a
plane spiral, usually
anchored at the inside.
A. Volute spring B. Motor spring

C. Hair spring D. Garter spring

Answer: B
23. A type of spring made in the form of a dished washer.
A. Volute spring B. Motor spring
C. Hair spring D. Belleville spring
Answer: D
24. In laminated spring, the strips are provided in different lengths
for:
A. Economy B. Reduction in weight
C. Improved appearance D. Space consideration
of the utility stage
Answer: A
25. An elastic stored energy machine element that when released,
will recover its
basic form.
A. Flywheel B. Clutch
C. Brakes D. Spring
Answer: D
26. When a spring is made of ductile material, the curvature factor
would be:
A. Zero B. Constant
 236

C. Unity D. Positive
Answer: C
27. The solid length plus then clearance plus the maximum
deflection.
A. Free length B. Height
C. Distance D. Original length
Answer: A
28. The majority of coils springs are made of coil tempered carbon
steel wire
containing _____ carbon.
A. 0.30 to 0.40% B. 0.40 to 0.50%
C. 0.50 to 0.60% D. 0.60 to 0.70%
Answer: D
29. Experimental results indicate that the actual frequency of the
springs is from.
A. 5 to 10% B. 10 to 15%
C. 15 to 20% D. 20 to 25%
Answer: B
30. According to W.M. Griffith, the critical frequency of the spring
should behold at
least _______ times the frequency of application of a periodic
load.
A. 5 B. 10
C. 15 D. 20
Answer: D
31. Eccentrically loaded bearing is also called:
A. Full bearing B. Offset bearing
C. Partial bearing D. Fitted bearing
Answer: B
32. The best instrument for measuring a thousandth of an inch.
A. Micrometer B. Tachometer
C. Caliper D. Pyrometer
Answer: A
33. Galvanized iron is term referring to iron coated with:
A. Aluminum B. Tin
C. Zinc D. Manganese
 237

Answer: C
34. The ability of metal to resist being crushed.
A. Shearing strength B. Compressive strength
C. Torsional strength D. tensile strength
Answer: B
35. Is the permissible variation of the size of a dimension.
A. Tolerance B. Allowance
C. Clearance D. Interference
Answer: A
36. The single force which produces the same effect upon a body
as two or more forces acting together is called:
A. Resultant force B. Co-planar force
C. Couple D. non-coplanar force
Answer: A
37. Product of mass and linear velocity is known as:
A. Impulse B. Linear momentum
C. Angular momentum D. Impact
Answer: B
38. What is the SAE specification number of molybdenum-
chromium-nickel?
A. 48XX B. 47XX
C. 46XX D. 45XX
Answer: B
39. Plus or minus of the tolerance is also called:
A. Total tolerance B. Unilateral tolerance
C. Bilateral tolerance D. None of these
Answer: C
40. Some experiments made at Cornell University showed that
experience mechanic
could bread a ______ bolt due to nut tightening.
A. 3/8 inch B. 5/8 inch
C. ½ inch D. 7/16 inch
Answer: B
41. The actual number of coil is ____ in a squared and ground
ends.
A. n B. n + 2
 238

C. nd D. (n + 1) d
Answer: B
42. The solid length of squared ends is:
A. (n+3) d B. (n+1) d
C. np D. n+2
Answer: A
43. The free length of ground ends is:
A. np + 3d B. np + 2d
C. np + d D. np
Answer: D
44. The shortest length for the spring during normal operation.
A. Compressed length B. Operating length
C. Solid length D. Free length
Answer: B
45. The relationship between the force exerted by a spring and its
deflection is called.
A. Spring index B. Spring rate

C. Wahl’s factor D. Spring angle

Answer: B
46. The ratio of the mean diameter of the spring to the wire
diameter is called:
A. Spring index B. Spring ratio

C. Spring rate D. Spring cons

Answer: A
47. Refers to the axial distance from a point on one coil to the
corresponding point on
the next adjacent coil.
A. Lead B. Spring distance
C. Pitch D. Spring deflection
Answer: C
48. The spring index for general industrial uses should be:
A. 5 to 7 B. 6 to 8
C. 7 to 9 D. 8 to 10
Answer: D
 239

49. What is the spring index of valve and clutch?

A. 3 B. 5
C. 7 D. 9
Answer: B
50. Refers to the space between adjacent coils when the spring is
compressed to its
operating length.
A. Coil allowance B. Coil tolerance
C. Coil clearance D. None of these
Answer: C
51. Common defects encountered in the Foundry shop steel
casting operation and
also in welding practices.
A. Cracks B. Cold shot
C. Parting line D. Blow/pin
Answer: D
52. This particular cutting tool material could withstand cutting
temperature 18000F
and higher at cutting speed beyond those possible with other
cutting tool
materials.
A. Titanium carbide B. Ceramic
C. Carbide grade D. Cubic boron nitride
Answer: D
53. Moment curve to a simple beam with a concentrated load at
middle span takes
the shape of a:
A. Triangle B. Rectangular
C. Trapezoid D. Semi-eclipses
Answer: A
54. Type of chuck wherein the workpiece with standard diameter
of size could be
attached fast and quick especially small size work of mass
production.
A. Lathe drive plate B. Clamp toe dog
C. Collet attachment D. Steady center rest
 240

Answer: C
55. Material may be stretched and still returns to its former
form/condition upon
release of force is called:
A. Plasticity B. Modulus of elasticity
C. Ductility D. Elastic limit
Answer: D
56. The brittleness in steel at elevated temperature is:
A. Hard drawn B. Cold lap
C. Red shortness D. Residual stresses
Answer: C
57. Intermediate gear is also called _____ gear in a gear train
arrangement.
A. Idler B. Pinion
C. Third gear D. Mounted gear
Answer: A
58. The top and bottom land for gears is similar formed as to crest
and ______ for
screw thread.
A. Flank B. Root
C. Flank tooth D. Topland
Answer: B
59. Cold drawing is also called:
A. Hard drawn B. Oxidized steel
C. Cold lap steel D. Strain hardening
Answer: A
60. Which of the following services is not considered to be a work
of a machinist?
A. Reboring B. Grinding
C. Overhauling D. Honing
Answer: C
61. The most practical spring designs produce a pitch angle is
less than:
A. 120 B. 150
C. 20 0 D. 250
Answer: A
 241

62. Engine valves get shut by means of:

A. Valve lock B. Tappet
C. Valve spring D. Adjusting screw
Answer: C
63. Which of the following materials is used for leaf and coil
springs?
A. AISI 3140 B. AISI 3150
C. AISI 3240 D. AISI 4063
Answer: D
64. The circumference of a coil spring times the effective number
of coils is called: A. Active length B. Solid
length
C. Compressed length D. Operating length
Answer: A
65. For springs subjected to light service, the factor of safety of
____ is suggested.
A. 1.5 B. 2.0
C. 2.5 D. 3.0
Answer: A
66. Refers to a flat or curved made of thin superimposed plates
and forming a
cantilever or beam of uniform strength.
A. Laminated spring B. Graduated spring
C. Full spring D. Conical spring
Answer: A
67. Cross wire grooves are types which:
A. Decrease the danger of skidding
B. Absorb shocks because of road unevenness
C. Provide good faction
D. Provide better load carrying capacity
Answer: B
68. The ______ of parallel connection of spring is always
constant.
A. Elongation B. Load
C. Thermal conductivity D. Resistance
Answer: A
 242

69. Speedometer drive is generally taken from:

A. Dynamo B. Flywheel
C. Gear D. Front wheel
Answer: D
70. The device for smoothing out the power impulses from the
engine is known as:
A. Clutch B. Flywheel
C. Gearbox D. Differential
Answer: B
71. In machine shop, hard forging operation of lengthening a
piece of stock while
reducing the cross-sectional area of work is called:
A. Bloating B. Upsetting
C. Spreading D. Draining out
Answer: B
72. The recommended age limit of fire tube boilers:
A. 35 years B. 30 years
C. 40 years D. 50 years
Answer: B
73. Silicon-Manganese steel designation, SAE _______.
A. 72XX B. 40XX
C. 92XX D. 9XX
Answer: C
74. The factor of safety generally applied in wire rope design
starts at 3-4 for standing
rope application, 5-12 for operating rope and _____ for
hazard to life and property
application like foundry operation.
A. Higher value B. 7 – 10
C. 8 – 10 D. 10 – 18
Answer: A
75. The maximum stress induced in a material when subjected to
intermittent or
repeated load without causing failure is called:
A. Ultimate stress B. Endurance limit
C. Ultimate torque D. Elastic limit
 243

Answer: B
76. Which of the following tools does not belong to the group?
A. Hermaprodite caliper B. Divider
C. Double VEE block D. Trammel
Answer: C
77. _________ is the theoretical profile of the thread for a length
of one pitch in the
axial plane on which design forms of both the external threads
are based.
A. Basic form of thread B. Effective thread
C. Basic profile of thread D. Design form of
external thread
Answer: C
78. One of the following materials is not mentioned for wire rope4
pulley/sheave
applications.
A. Plastic B. Iron
C. Paper D. Copper alloy
Answer: A
79. Internal stress exerted by the fibers to resist the action of
outside force is called:
A. Shearing stress B. Tensile stress
C. Ultimate stress D. Compressive stress
Answer: A
80. ______ thread is used where the thread requires great
strength and usually cut
square on one side and slanting on the other side.
A. Janno B. Buttress
C. Square D. Double
Answer: B
81. Typical hub length falls between:
A. 1.25 D to 2.4 D B. 1.25 D to 5 D

C. 1.3 D to 3.4 D D. D to 7 D
Answer: A
 244

82. The recommended coefficient of fluctuation of flywheels for

punching, shearing
and pressing machine is:
A. 0.05 to 0.10 B. 0.03 to 0.05
C. 0.002 to 0.005 D. 0.01 to 0.02
Answer: A
83. Attached to the rear end of the crankshaft is the:
A. Vibration damper B. Flywheel
C. Drive pulley D. Timing gear
Answer: B
84. Flywheel is also known as:
A. Steering wheel B. Front wheel
C. Balance wheel D. Rear wheel
Answer: C
85. What energy is stored in flywheels?
A. Kinetic energy B. Internal energy
C. Potential energy D. Rest energy
Answer: A
86. What is the function of the flywheel?
A. To keep the speed fluctuation within the desired limits
B. To limit the momentary rise or fall in speed during
sudden changes of load
C. To keep the angular advance or retardation within
prescribed limits as
compared with a perfectly uniform angular speed

D. All of these
Answer: D
87. In many flywheel designs, about how many percent of the
weight is concentrated
in the hub and arms?
A. 20 B. 30
C. 35 D. 45
Answer: B
88. A large rotary machine part whose function is to store energy
and to produce
 245

uniform angular velocity of the shaft reciprocating engine.

A. Cam B. Idler
C. Flywheel D. Chuck
Answer: C
89. A massive wheel, which by its inertia assists in securing
uniform motion of machinery by resisting sudden changes of
speed.
A. Linkage B. Crank
C. Planetary gears D. Flywheel
Answer: D
90. The function of a flywheel is to:
A. Complete the unuseful stroke B. Operate the engines
C. Keep the engines weight light D. None of these
Answer: A
91. In greater quantity, this element is harmful to the molten
ferrous metal.
A. Silicon B. Aluminum
C. Oxides D. Sulfur
Answer: D
92. For economical coast in the manufacturing large worm gears,
the following
materials are usually applied.
A. Bronze rim with steel spider
B. Cast rim with bronze spider
C. Cast steel rim with brass spider
D. Alloyed aluminum rim with cast iron spider
Answer: A
93. Non-metallic material of high melting temperature being used
as furnace lining.
A. Quartz bricks B. Refractories
C. Silica sand D. Dolomite clay bricks
Answer: B
94. Chromium steel (to include heat and corrosion resistant)
designation.
A. SAE 56XX B. SAE 514XX
 246

C. SAE 61XX D. SAE 9XX

Answer: B
95. Mirror finish has surfaces finess of _____ rms.
A. 1 B. 2 to 8
C. 1 to 3 D. 2 to 5
Answer: A
96. All terms and abbreviations deal with wire rope arrangement
except this ____
which deals with wire rope materials strength.
A. Performed B. IWRC C. Mps D.
Lang lay
Answer: C
97. Alloy steel axle under repeated load/stress will eventually fail if
the load/stress is
above the endurance for the steel under consideration. The
endurance limit of the
steel is therefore:
A. Equal to the allowable stress of the module of elasticity
B. Equal to half of the ultimate strength
C. Equal to module of elasticity D. Equal to 80% of the
elastic limit’
Answer: B
98. Tap not used for cutting thread _______:
A. Tapping tap B. Bottoming tap C. Plugging tap
D. Taper tap
Answer: A
99. Relief angle of single-point cutting mild steel cast iron and
other average wok as
recommended should be in the ranges of ____ degrees for
high speed tools.
A. 8 to 12 B. 10 to 15 C. 5 to 7 D. 12 to 16
Answer: A
100. Which of the following is an unsafe condition in operating a
lathe machine?
A. Wearing denim pants/safety shoes B. Wearing a
canvass apron
 247

C. Operating with safety gloves D. Wearing safety

goggles/hearing aid
Answer: B
ELEMENTS 17

1. Tooth width measurement along the chord at the pitch circle.

A. Chord Space B. Chord Clearance
C. Chordal Thickness D. Chordal Length
Answer: C
2. Herringbone gears are gears which:
A. Do not operate parallel shafts
B. Have a line contact between the teeth
C. Tend to produce and thrust on the shafts
D. Consists of two left handed helical gears
Answer: B
3. In usual spur gearing, the:
A. Pitch circle and base circle are the same
B. Working depth includes clearance
C. Tooth outline are always cycloidal curves
D. Tooth outlines are usually involute curves
Answer: D
4. ______ is a kind of gear used to transmit motion from one shaft
to another shaft at
angle to the first.
A. Worm Gear B. Bevel Gear
C. Helical Gear D. Spur Gear
Answer: B
5. A circle coinciding with a tangent to the bottom of the tooth
spaces.
A. Pitch Circle B. Root Circle
C. Base Circle D. Outside Circle
Answer: B
6. A circle the radius of which is equal to the distance from the
gear axis to the pitch
point.
A. Pitch Circle B. Root Circle
 248

C. Base Circle D. Outside Circle

Answer: A
7. Ratio of pitch diameter to the number of teeth.
A. Diametral Pitch B. Module
C. Contact Ratio D. Helical Overlap
Answer: B
8. A kind of gear used for duty works where a large ratio of speed
is required and are
extensively used in speed reducer is known as:
A. Worm Gear B. Spiral Gear
C. Helical Gear D. Bevel Gear
Answer: A
9. The ratio of the number of teeth to the number of mm of pitch
diameter equals
number of gear teeth to each mm pitch diameter.
A. Diametral Pitch B. Module
C. Circular Pitch D. English Module
Answer: A
10. The depth of tooth space below the pitch circle.
A. Dedendum B. Working Depth
C. Full Depth D. Tooth Depth
Answer: A
11. For shafts, the shear due to bending is a maximum at the
neutral plane where the
normal stress is:
A. Minimum B. Constant
C. Maximum also D. Zero
Answer: D
12. The minimum value of numerical combined shock and fatigue
factor to be applied
in every case to the computed bending moment of the shaft
is:
A. 2.0 B. 1.75
C. 1.5 D. 1.3
Answer: C
13. What is the other name given to short shafts on machines?
 249

A. Spindles B. Head shafts

C. Core shafts D. All of these
Answer: A
14. What is the other name given to a line shaft?
A. Countershaft B. Main shaft
C. Long shaft D. Head shaft
Answer: B
15. The speed at which the center of mass will be equal the
deflecting forces on the
shaft; the shaft with is attached bodies will then vibrate
violently, since the
centrifugal force changes its direction as the shaft turns in:
A. Nominal speed B. Critical speed
C. Relative speed D. Mean speed
Answer: B
16. An old rule of thumb for transmission shafting is that the
deflection should not
exceed _____ of length between supports.
A. 0.01 in. per foot B. 0.08 in. per foot
C. 0.02 in. per foot D. 0.05 in. per foot
Answer: A
17. For transmission, shafts the allowable deflection is 1 degree in
a length of _____
diameters.
A. 20 B. 25
C. 30 D. 40
Answer: A
18. What is the limiting torsional deflection for machinery shafts. If
the criteria of
limiting torsional deflection vary from 0.080 per foot of length.
A. 10 B. 2.50
C. 2 0 D. 3.50
Answer: A
19. Bevel gears of sizes 5 in. to 15 in. should not be lift or depress
more than _____, as
Gleason statement.
 250

A. 0.004 B. 0.003
C. 0.002 D. 0.001
Answer: B
20. What type of key that allows the hub to move along the shaft
but prevents the rotation of the shaft?
A. Woodruf key B. Feather key
C. Gibbs key D. Square key
Answer: B
21. The total depth of a tooth space, equal to addendum plus
dedendum.
A. Full Depth B. Working Depth
C. Whole Depth D. Dedendum
Answer: C
22. A circle coinciding with a tangent to the bottom of the tooth
space.
A. Root Circle B. Pitch Circle
C. Addendum Circle D. Dedendum
Answer: A
23. The diameter of a circle coinciding with the top of the teeth of
an internal gear.
A. Pitch Diameter B. Root Diameter
C. Internal Diameter D. Central Diameter
Answer: C
24. A gear with teeth on the outer cylindrical surface.
A. Outer Gear B. External Gear
C. Spiral Gear D. Helical Gear
Answer: B
25. Addendum of a cycloidal gear tooth.
A. Cycloid B. Epicycloid
C. Straight Rack D. Involute
Answer: B
26. When meshed with a gear, it is used to change rotary motion
to reciprocating
motion is:
A. Gear Shaft B. Gear Tooth
C. Gear Rack D. Gear Motor
 251

Answer: C
27. The portion of a gear tooth space that is cut below the pitch
circle and is equal to
the addendum plus the clearance.
A. Top Root B. Dedendum
C. Addendum D. Tooth Space
Answer: B
28. The portion of a gear tooth that projects above or outside the
pitch circle.
A. Top Relief B. Dedendum
C. Addendum D. Tooth Space
Answer: C
29. The distance from the center of one tooth of a gear to the
center next consecutive
tooth measured on the pitch.
A. Circular Pitch B. Module
C. Diametral Pitch D. Circular Pitch
Answer: A
30. The number of teeth per inch of pitch diamtere and which
gives some indications
of the size of the gear teeth.
A. Module B. Pitch Circle
C. Diametral Pitch D. Circular Pitch
Answer: C
31. What is the other name for Kennedy key?
A. Tangential key B. Woodruf key

C. Saddle key D. Rollpin

Answer: A
32. What type of fits used for involute spline?
A. Close fit B. Press fit
C. Sliding fit D. All of these
Answer: B
33. Which of the following is used to permanent splines except
that the pressure angle
is 14.50?
 252

A. Separation load B. Spline shaft

C. Stub serrations D. Involute serrations
Answer: D
34. It is used a coupling, or in addition to another couplings where,
in case of overload,
there is danger of injury to machine or to material in process.
A. Shear pin B. Flange coupling
C. Involute serrations D. King pin
Answer: A
35. What is the maximum shaft angle for a single Hooke’s
coupling?
A. 100 B. 170
C. 15 0 D. 200
Answer: C
36. What are the two principal parts of a Journal bearing?
A. Bearing and journal B. Shaft and Babbitt
C. Clearance and fitted D. Shaft and cylinder
Answer: A
37. When the line of action of the load, bisects the arc of partial
bearing, the bearing is
said to be:
A. Eccentrically loaded B. Fully loaded
C. Centrally loaded D. Partially loaded
Answer: C
38. What is the difference in radii of the bearing and journal?
A. Even clearance B. Clearance ratio
C. Odd clearance D. Radial clearance
Answer: D
39. When radii of both the bearing and the journal are the same,
then the bearing is
said to be:
A. Fitted bearing B. Clearance bearing
C. Full bearing D. Ambiguous bearing
Answer: A
40. What is the line that passes through the centers of the bearing
and the journals.
 253

A. Line of action B. Line of centers

C. Line of symmetry D. Tangent line
Answer: B
41. An imaginary circle passing through the points at which the
teeth of the meshing
gears contact each other.
A. Pitch Circle B. Addendum Circle
C. Dedendum Circle D. Base Circle
Answer: A
42. If the lead angle of a worm is 22.5 degrees then the helix
angle will be _______.
A. 45 degrees B. 67.5 degrees
C. 22.5 degrees D. 90 degrees
Answer: B
43. Refers to the smallest wheel of a gear train.
A. Pinion B. Idler
C. Spur D. Driver
Answer: A
44. Spiral gears are suitable for transmitting:
A. Small power B. Any power
C. Huge power D. Pulsating power
Answer: A
45. Zero axial thrust is experienced in:
A. Helical gears B. Herringbone gears

C. Spiral gears D. Bevel gears

Answer: B
46. Bevel gears are used to transmit rotary motion between two
shafts whose axes
are:
A. Parallel B. Non-coplanar
C. Non-intersecting D. None of these
Answer: D
47. According to law of gearing:
A. teeth should be involute type
B. Clearance between mating teeth should be provided
 254

C. Dedendum should be equal to 1.57 M

D. None of these
Answer: D
48. Gears for watches are generally manufactured by:
A. Die casting B. Machining on hobber

C. Machining on a gear shaper D. Stamping

Answer: D
49. In case of gears, the addendum is given by:
A. One module B. 2.157 x module
C. 1.57 x module D. 1.25 x module
Answer: A
50. In case of cross helical worm, the axes of two shafts are:
A. Parallel B. Intersecting
C. Non-parallel D. Non-parallel/non-
intersecting
Answer: D
51. Which of the following is considered advantageous for bearing
materials?
A. Conformability B. Compatibilty
C. Embeddability D. All of these
Answer: D
52. What is the recommended coefficient of fluctuation of
flywheels for punching,
shearing, pressing machine?
A. 0.005 – 0.1 B. 0.007 – 0.01

C. 0.03 – 0.05 D. 0.01 – 0.03

Answer: A
53. Which of the following considers the 200 series of bearing?
A. Heavy B. Medium
C. Light D. All of these
Answer: C
54. Which of the following considers the 300 series of the
bearing?
A. Heavy B. Medium
 255

C. Light D. All of these

Answer: B
55. A type of roller bearing which the balls are assembled by the
eccentric
displacement of the inner ring.
A. Shallow groove ball bearing B. Filling-slot ball bearing
C. Self-aligning ball bearing D. Deep-groove ball
bearing
Answer: D
56. Which of the following is not a type of ball bearing?
A. Shallow groove ball bearing B. Filling-slot ball bearing
C. Self-aligning ball bearing D. Deep groove ball
bearing
Answer: A
57. What is the usual density of the leather belt?
A. 0.035 lb/in3 B. 0.0135 lb/in3
C. 0.025 lb/in 3 D. 0.0465 lb/in3
Answer: A
58. Which of the following is the approximate density of a fat
rubber belt?
A. 0.055 lb/in3 B. 0.0135 lb/in3
C. 0.045 lb/in3 D. 0.0465 lb/in3
Answer: C
59. A toothed wheel whose tooth elements are straight and
parallel to the shaft axis
or used to transmit motion and power between parallel shafts.
A. Helical gear B. Spur gear
C. Worm gear D. Bevel gear
Answer: B
60. The breaking strength of oak-tanned beltings varies from 3 to
more than:
A. 5 ksi B. 6 ksi
C. 7 ksi D. 9 ksi
Answer: B
61. In case of spur gears, the flank of the tooth is:
 256

A. The part of the tooth surface lying below the pitch

surface
B. The curve forming face and flank
C. The width of the gear tooth measured axially along the
pitch surface
D. The surface of the top of the tooth
Answer: A
62. A reverted gear train is one in which:
A. The direction of rotation of first and last gear is opposite
B. The direction of rotation of first and last gear is the same
C. The first and last gear are essentially on separate but
parallel shafts D. None of these
Answer: C
63. For best running conditions of gear, the contact ratio should be
about:
A. 1.25 to 1.40 B. 1.20 to 1.45
C. 1.34 to 1.56 D. 1.62 to 1.45
Answer: A
64. The ______ full depth teeth have the advantages of the
greater capacity and less
interference trouble.
A. 14.50 B. 240
C. 20 0 D. 30 0

Answer: C
65. _______ is the average tangential force on the teeth is then
obtained from the
horsepower.
A. Total load B. Separation load
C. Pressure load D. Tangential load
Answer: D
66. The service factor of a gear may be taken as ______ is an
electric motor drives a
centrifugal blower.
A. 1 B. 2
C. 3 D. 4
Answer: A
 257

67. The kind of a wear occurs because of a fatigue failure of the

surface material as a
result of high contact stresses is known as:
A. Slotting B. Pitting
C. Involuting D. Curving
Answer: B
68. _______ is caused by foreign matter such as grit or metal
particles or by a failure
of the oil film at low speed.
A. Suction B. Scoring
C. Abrasion D. Corrosion
Answer: C

69. ______ occurs when the oil film fails but in this case, the load
and speed are so
high that the surface metal is melted and the metal is melted
and the metal is
smeared down the profile.
A. Abrasion B. Corrosion
C. Spalling D. Scoring
Answer: D
70. ______ is a surface fatigue of greater extent than pitting that is
the flakes are
much larger. This type of failure occurs in surface-hardened
teeth.
A. Abrasion B. Corrosion
C. Spalling D. Scoring
Answer: C
71. Experience suggests that the most economical designs are
obtained for a belt
speed of:
A. 6000 to 7500 fpm B. 3000 to 5000 fpm
C. 3500 to 4700 fpm D. 5000 to 1000 fpm
Answer: A
72. The tension in the belt due to centrifugal force increasing
rapidly above about:
 258

A. 2500 fpm B. 3000 fpm

C. 3500 fpm D. 4000 fpm
Answer: A
73. What is the recommended speed for leather belts?
A. 6000 to 7000 fpm B. 5000 to 6000 fpm

C. 7000 to 8000 fpm D. 4500 to 5600 fpm

Answer: C
74. What is the usual recommended speed for fabric belts?
A. 4000 to 5000 fpm B. 3000 to 4000 fpm
C. 2000 to 3000 fpm D. 2000 and more fpm
Answer: D
75. Which of the following is the recommended initial tension of
the belt?
A. 75 lb/in of width B. 73 lb/in of width
C. 71 lb/in of width D. 80 lb/in of width
Answer: C
76. Two shafts at right angles to each other may be connected by
what arrangement?
A. Half turn B. Quarter turn
C. ¾ turn D. One turn
Answer: B
77. What is the minimum number of teeth on a smaller sprocket
for low speed?
A. 12 B. 21
C. 17 D. 14
Answer: A
78. What is the minimum number of teeth on a smaller sprocket
for moderate speed?
A. 17 B. 21
C. 12 D. 14
Answer: A
79. What is the usual minimum number of teeth on a smaller
sprocket for high speed?
A. 21 B. 24
C. 12 D. 14
 259

Answer: A
70. Which of the following is the measure of torsional stress?
A. Accuracy B. Stiffness
C. Rigidity D. Precision
Answer: B
81. Buckingham says that mating phenolic gears with steel of
BHN less than ______
leads to excessive abrasive wear.
A. 200 B. 300
C. 400 D. 500
Answer: C
82. ______ is the extra tooth in gear, which is use to distribute the
wera more evenly.
A. Hunting tooth B. Tooth profile
C. Dummy tooth D. Add tooth
Answer: A
83. The length of the hub should not be made _____ the face
width of the gear.
A. Less than B. Equal
C. Greater D. None of these
Answer: A
84. ______ is a gear that has teeth cut on the inside of the rim
instead of on the
outside.
A. External gear B. Involute gear
C. Stub gear D. Annular gear
Answer: D
85. To eliminate fouling, let the minimum differences in tooth
numbers between the
internal gear and pinion be _____ for 14.5 deg involute depth.
A. 10 teeth B. 12 teeth
C. 14 teeth D. 16 teeth
Answer: B
86. The loss pair of spur, helical or bevel gears in an ordinary train
should not exceed.
A. 4% B. 6%
 260

C. 2% D. 5%
Answer: C
87. The typical helix angle ranges from _____ to ______.
A. 10 deg to 12 deg B. 12 deg to 15 deg
C. 14 deg to 20 deg D. 15 deg to 25 deg
Answer: D
88 ______ is the advance of the tooth in the face width divided by
circular pitch.
A. Face contact ratio B. Speed ratio
C. Profile ratio D. Advance ratio
Answer: A
89. The distance between the teeth measured on the pitch surface
along a normal to
the helix.
A. Lead B. Lead angle
C. Normal circular pitch D. Pitch
Answer: C
90. The hardness of helical and herringbone teeth cut after heat
treatment will
generally fall between the limits of _____.
A. 210 and 300 Brinell B. 147 and 300 Brinell
C. 230 and 320 Brinell D. 220 and 320
Brinell
Answer: A
91. When tested in compression, ductile materials usually exhibit
____ characteristics
up to the yield strength as they do when tested in tension.
A. The same B. More than
C. Less than D. Approximately the same
Answer: D
92. A tolerance where the size of a part is permitted to be either
larger or smaller than
the given dimension.
A. Bilateral B. UInilateral
C. Lateral D. None of these
Answer: A
 261

93. A fit generally used on those dimensions involved in a fit; such

as pin in a hole.
A. Unilateral B. Lateral
C. Bilateral D. None of these
Answer: C
94. It is relatively finely spaced irregularities of the surfaces.
A. Smoothness B. Waviness
C. Lay D. Roughness
Answer: D
95. Which of the following is the surface finish of heavy cuts of
coarse feed?
A. 200 rms B. 400 rms
C. 80 rms D. 500 or greater rms
Answer: D
96. Which of the following is the most dominant cause
(approximately 80%) of
machine failures?
A. Torsion B. Negligence
C. Fatigue failures D. Compression
Answer: C
97. For wrought steel in its commonly met commercial forms, it is
often assumed that
the average endurance limit for an average su (50% survival)
with the Brinell
hardness is limited to:
A. 500 B. 400
C. 240 D. 450
Answer: B
98. What is the range of the endurance ratio or Czaud quotes
values for steel?
A. 0.23 to 0.65 B. 0.34 to 0.87
C. 0.63 to 0.93 D. 0.34 to 0.45
Answer: B
99. Which of the following indicates the degree of concentration?
A. Power factor B. Service facto
 262

C. Stress factor D. Stress concentration

factor
Answer: D
100. The internal stresses that exist in any part of the temperature
and not acted upon
by an external load.
A. Residual stress B. Form stress
C. Superposed stress D. Control stress
Answer: A

ELEMENTS 18

1. A shaft that is used to connect or disconnect at will is called:

 263

A. Clutch B. Bearing
C. Brake Shaft D. Lock Shaft
Answer: A
2. The frictional forces depend on coefficient of friction and:
A. Torque B. Weights of object
C. Normal Force D. Moment
Answer: C
3. Friction devices used to regulate the motion of bodies and with
clutches.
A. Rollers B. Brakes
C. Babbitt D. Holders
Answer: B
4. The part of the total frictional energy that is stored in the brake
parts, principally in
the drum or disk has been estimated at ______.
A. 56% up B. 86% up
C. 90% up D. 75% up
Answer: D
5. The part of an automobile disc clutch that presses against the
flywheel is referred to
as:
A. Contact plate B. Friction plate
C. Pressure plate D. Sliding plate
Answer: C
6. The brake capacity to absorb energy is known as:
A. Energy B. Resistance brake
C. Potential D. Braking torque
Answer: D
7. If the band wraps partly around the brake wheel or drum and
brake action is
obtained by pulling the band tight onto the wheel. This type of
brake is known as:
A. Block brake B. band brake
C. Clutch D. Centrifugal brake
Answer: B
 264

8. The brake lining operating at temperature _____, sintered

mixtures containing
ceramics are used.
A. 7500F to 10000F B. 5600F to 9000F
C. 8000F to 12000F D. 4000F to 7890F
Answer: A
9. Hydrodynamic brake is the major type of:
A. Air brake B. Fluid brake
C. Electric brake D. Spot brake
Answer: B
10. Types of brakes that are capable of stopping the motion of a
machine member as
well as retarding its motion.
A. Electrical brake B. Fluid brake
C. Air brake D. Mechanical brake
Answer: D
11. It is the process that cold works a limited amount of material,
thus giving a higher
strength, and it leaves a surface compressive stress.
A. Surface finishing B. Tensioning
C. Surfacing D. Surface rolling
Answer: B
12. Fatigue strength is increased by repeated loads just below the
normal fatigue limit,
followed by small step by step increase of the loading.
A. Coaxing B. Triaxing
C. Mixing D. Relieving
Answer: A
13. It is the diameter of the imaginary cylinder that bounds the
crest of an external
thread and the roots of an internal thread.
A. Mean diameter B. Root diameter
C. Stress diameter D. Major diameter
Answer: D
14. It is the distance in inches a screw thread (a helix) advances
axially in one turn.
 265

A. Pitch B. Mean pitch

C. Lead D. Circular pitch
Answer: C
15. Which of the following bolts is recommended for general use?
A. UNC B. UNEF
C. UNF D. NC
Answer: A
16. Which of the following is frequently used bolt in automotive
and aircraft
industries?
A. UNC B. UNEF
C. UNF D. NC
Answer: C
17. Which of the following is a particular bolt used in aeronautical
equipment?
A. UNC B. UNEF
C. UNF D. NC
Answer: B
18. What type of bolt used for high-pressure pipe flanges, cylinder
head studs etc.
A. UNC B. UNF
C. UNEF D. 8 UN
Answer: D
19. It is the stress or load induced by the tightening operation.
A. Initial stress B. Initial tension

C. Residual stress D. None of these

Answer: A
20. For non-metallic gaskets, it has been found that they should
have a certain minimum amount of compression as ______ for a
certain cork gasket.
A. 62% B. 86%
C. 68% D. 76%
Answer: A
21. It is considered as the simplest type of mechanical brake.
A. Differential brake B. Block brake
 266

C. Band brake D. Brake shoe

Answer: C
22. The friction devices used to connect shafts.
A. Brakes B. Clutches
C. Spring D. Holder
Answer: B
23. A clutch that has a disadvantage of heavier rotary masses.
A. Multiple disc clutch B. Disc clutch
C. Cone clutch D. None of these
Answer: A
24. The overrunning clutch.
A. Should be oiled B. Should be repacked with
grease
C. Can not be lubricated D. Contains no lubricant
Answer: C
25. The overrunning clutch:
A. Transmits cranking force to the engine flywheel
B. Is one way clutch
C. Prevents the engine flywheel from driving the starting
motor
D. All of these
Answer: D
26. Clutch, gear box, differential etc. are the parts of:
A. Charging system B. Transmission system
C. Cooling system D. None of these
Answer: B
27. In motor vehicles, it very common practice to use a:
A. Multiple clutch B. Hydraulic clutch
C. Cone clutch D. Single plate clutch
Answer: D
28. The clutch finger is pushed by:
A. Clutch fork B. Clutch
C. Clutch bearing D. None of these
Answer: C
29. A hydraulic clutch doesn’t incorporate a:
A. Clutch plate B. Oil plate
 267

C. Vacuum plate D. Non of these

Answer: A
30. The lining of a brake shoe:
A. Can be changed B. Can not be fitted
C. Can be fitted with spring D. None of these
Answer: A
31. It is a screw fastening with a nut on it.
A. Bolt B. U – bolt
C. Rivet D. Screw
Answer: A
32. A fastening which has no nut and turns in to a threaded hole.
A. Bolt B. Fastener
C. Rivet D. Screw
Answer: D
33. An old name for an unfinished through bolt comes with a
square.
A. Coupling bolt B. Stud bolt
C. Machine bolt D. Automobile bolt
Answer: C
34. It is a type of coil where the helical coil is wrapped into a circle
forming an annular
ring.
A. Volute spring B. Hair spring
C. Motor spring D. Garter spring
Answer: D
35. It is a type of spring where thin flat strip wound up on itself as
a plane spiral,
usually anchored at the inside end.
A. Motor spring B. Garter spring
C. Volute spring D. Helical spring
Answer: A
36. It is the ratio of the length of the column and the radius of
column of the cross-
sectional area about a centroid axis.
A. Contact ratio B. Slenderness ratio
 268

C. Centroidal ratio D. Column ratio

Answer: B
37. Under the theories of failure, for static loading of ductile
material, the design
stress is:
A. Yield stress / factor of safety B. Ultimate stress /
factor safety
C. Ultimate stress / proportional limit D. Yield point /
proportional limit
Answer: A
38. Under the theories of failure, the value of shear stress is how
many times that of
the tensile stress?
A. Four times B. Half
C. Double D. One-forth
Answer: B
39. The theory of mechanics of material shows that the results
form the octahedral
shear stress theory and those from the maximum distortion-
energy theory are:
A. The same B. Less than
C. More than D. Not related
Answer: A
40. It is the distance measure axially from one point on one thread
to the
corresponding point on an adjacent thread.
A. Axial pitch B. Z – pitch
C. Lead D. Lead angle
Answer: A
41. Due to air effect, the hydraulic brakes become:
A. More effective B. Ineffective
C. Possible D. None of these
Answer: B
42. The efficiency of hydraulic braking system is:
A. About 90 percent B. 60 – 80 percent
C. 50 – 60 percent D. 40 – 50 percent
 269

Answer: A
43. The SAE recommends an angle of ____ fro con e clutches
faced with leather or
asbestos or having cork inserts.
A. 7.50 B. 9.50
C. 12.5 0 D. 14.50
Answer: C
44. Why does a clutch create noise?
A. Clutch release bearings is either dry or defective
B. Clutch spring is broken
C. Clutch is faulty
D. All of these
Answer: D
45. What faults develop in the brakes?
A. Brakes do not work properly B. Brakes do not
disengage
C. Brakes make noise D. All of these
Answer: D
46. Which of the following types of brakes are also changed while
replacing brake
lining?
A. Brake shoes B. Shoe rivets
C. Shoe spring D. Block brake
Answer: B
47. Power brakes require ______ power.
A. Equal B. Less
C. More D. Pulsating
Answer: B
48. What type of oil used in the hydraulic brake system?
A. Engine oil B. Gear oil
C. Brake oil D. Clutch oil
Answer: C
49. The principal parts of a hydraulic brake system are the master
cylinder and the:
A. Multi-cylinder B. Wheel cylinder
C. Brake wire D. Brake shoe
 270

Answer: B
50. In the mechanical brake system, the main function is of:
A. Spring B. Cam
C. Shoe adjuster D. Shoe rivets
Answer: B
51. It is the angle between a tangent to the pitch helix and plane
normal to the axis of
the screw.
A. Helix angle B. Lead angle
C. Tangent angle D. Vertical angle
Answer: B
52. It is suggested that the design factor on the yield strength be
about 1.5 for the
smooth load, about 2 to 2.25 for minor shock loading, and up
to _____ for severe
shock loads, especially when the loading reverses during
operation.
A. 4.5 B. 3.5
C. 3.0 D. 4.0
Answer: A
53. A typical hub length fall between ______.
A. 1.25 D to 2.5 D B. 1.3 D to 3.4 D
C. 1.25 D to 4.0 D D. D to 7.0 D
Answer: A
54. A key with one several patented methods of keying is driven or
pressed into a hole
that is small enough to close the slit, assembled in radial
direction.
A. Fit key B. Roll pin
C. Saddle key D. Pin key
Answer: B
55. A key that allows the hub to move along the shaft but prevents
the rotation of the
shaft.
A. Woodruf key B. Gibs key
C. Feather key D. Square key
 271

Answer: C
56. For involute spline, the type of fits used:
A. Close fit B. Sliding fit
C. Press fit D. All of these
Answer: C
57. A coupling that transmits power via the frictional forces
induced by pulling the
flange toward each other over slotted tapered sleeves.
A. Flange coupling B. Ribbed compression
coupling
C. Rigid coupling D. Flanged compression
coupling
Answer: D
58. A coupling used for absorbing some shock and vibration that
may appear on one
shaft and of preventing the occurrence of reversed stresses
caused by the shaft
deflecting at the coupling preventing at the coupling.
A. Rigid coupling B. Flange coupling
C. Flexible coupling D. None of these
Answer: C
59. It is the difference in the radii of the bearing and the journal.
A. Even clearance B. Clearance ratio
C. Fit clearance D. Radial clearance
Answer: D
60. A bearing in which the radii of the journal and the bearing are
the same.
A. Fitted bearing B. Full bearing
C. Partial bearing D. Clearance bearing
Answer: A
61. In motor vehicles, there is a ______ in addition of foot brake.
A. hand brake B. Hydraulic brake
C. Mechanical brake D. Band brake
Answer: A
62. Which of the following is also used in the suspension system?
A. Shock absorbers B. Brake shoes
 272

C. Cams D. Block brakes

Answer: A
63. There are ____ plates in a multi-plate clutch.
A. More than one B. Less than four
C. More than ten D. Less than one
Answer: A
64. Hydraulic clutches are used in ____ vehicles.
A. Costly B. Foreign made

C. Cheap D. Affordable
Answer: A
65. Which of the following is mounted inside the clutch?
A. An engine B. Gear box propeller shaft
C. Both the rear axle D. All of these
Answer: B
66 Which clutch is suitable for mine hoists and other services
where heavy loads are
accompanied by severe shock?
A. Band clutch B. Block clutch
C. Centrifugal clutch D. Expanding ring clutch
Answer: A
67. It is used to protect a machine in case of jamming and for
overload protection of
motors and engine.
A. Dry fluid clutch B. Magnetic clutch
C. Eddy clutch D. Slip clutch
Answer: D
68. Refers to the simplest type of brakes.
A. Differential brakes B. Block brakes
C. Band brakes D. Brake shoe
Answer: C
69. The practical length of shoe is limited to about:
A. 750 B. 900
C. 1200 D. 1800
Answer: C
 273

70. If the angle of contact is _____ , the pressure between the

brakes shoe and the
drum can not be considered uniform.
A. Less than 45 deg B. Less than 60 deg
C. Greater than 60 deg D. Greater than 120 deg
Answer: C
71. What is the appropriate length-to-diameter ratio of
hydrodynamic bearings?
A. 1 B. 4
C. 3 D. 2
Answer: A
72. The operating temperature of oil films in the bearing must
approximately:
A. 1400F to 1500F B. 1400F to 1600F C. 1200F to 1900F
D. 1200F to 1900F
Answer: B
73. At higher temperatures, oil oxidizes more rapidly above:
A. 1200F B. 2000F C. 1400F
0
D. 160 F
Answer: B
74. For thrust bearing, the speed at moderate operating condition
is:
A. 50 <Vm> 200 fpm B. 50 <Vm> 250 fpm

C. 50 <Vm> 220 fpm D. 50 <Vm> 250fpm

Answer: A
75. If the ends are joined by wire lacing with machine, the usual
efficiency of joint is:
A. 100% B. 75%
C. 85% D. 88%
Answer: D
76. On high speed centrifugal blowers, it has been observed that
the arc of contact is
reduced from 1800 at rest ___ in motion.
A. 1000 B. 900
C. 950 D. 1100
 274

Answer: D
77. The recommended net belt pull for rubber belt is:
A. 11.34 lb/ply per inch of width B. 13.75 lb/ply per
inch of width
C. 16.35 lb/ply per inch of width D. 20.34 lb/ply per
inch of width
Answer: B
78. For minimum quietness, use sprockets with ____ or more
teeth.
A. 21 B. 23
C. 25 D. 27
Answer: D
79. If two intersecting shafts are to be belt connected _____ guide
pulleys are to be used.
A. 1 B. 2
C. 3 D. 4
Answer: B
80. Wire ropes are made from cold-drawn with _____ or more
teeth.
A. 21 B. 23
C. 25 D. 27
Answer: D
81. It is used to stop the motion of a moving object.
A. Clutch B. Brakes
C. Band clutch D. Band brake
Answer: B
82. The effectiveness of the brake may greatly decrease shortly
after it begins to act
continuously, a phenomenon called:
A. Creep B. Pressurized

C. Fade D. Worn-out
Answer: C
83. Type of brake under the category of power brake is known as:
A. Servo brake B. Band brake
C. Differential brake D. Brake shoe
 275

Answer: A
84. Clutches which are designed to transmit torque for one
direction of rotation of the
driver and then free-wheel or transmit essentially no torque
when the direction of
the driver rotation is reversed.
A. Magnetic clutches B. Trip clutches
C. Overrunning clutches D. Slip clutches
Answer: C
85. The reason for noise at the time of engaging brake.
A. Back plate being loose or bent B. Brake shoe
being loose or bent
C. Brake drum could be defective D. All of these
Answer: D
86. When the vehicle runs brake drum becomes hot because of
friction of the shoe.
This fault is known as ______.
A. Brake lining B. Brake winding
C. Back plate D. None of these
Answer: B
87. The maintenance of mechanical brake is:
A. Expensive B. Economical
C. Costly D. None of these
Answer: B
88. What is the most common defect of clutch?
A. Slip of the clutch
B. Clutch does not disengage properly
C. Clutch creates noise
D. All of these
Answer: D
89. The act keeping some pressure on the clutch pedal at the time
of driving is known
as:
A. Hydraulic clutch B. Slip of the clutch
C. Riding on clutch D. Clutch adjustment
Answer: C
 276

90. Which of the following shortcomings in the cone clutch

because of which the
clutch is not used?
A. Clutch slips quickly B. It occupies
more space
C. Adjustment has to be done early D. All of these
Answer: D

91. A wire rope that the wires and strands are twisted in the
opposite direction.
A. Long lay B. Perform
C. Regular lay D. Lang lay
Answer: C
92. A wire rope that the wires and strand are twisted in the same
direction.
A. Long lay B. Perform
C. Regular lay D. Lang lay
Answer: D
93. Which of the following ropes is used for haulage, rigging,
guard rails?
A. 6 x 35 IWRC B. 6 x 15 IWRC
C. 7 x 8 IWRC D. 7 x 7 IWRC
Answer: D
94 Which of the following has been considered as general
purpose rope?
A. 6 x 19 IWRC B. 7 x 25 IWRC
C. 7 x 25 IWRC D. 6 x 9 IWRC
Answer: A
95 Which of the following ropes is used for lines, hawsers,
overhead cranes and hoists?
A. 6 x 37 IWRC B. 6 x 35 IWRC
C. 6 x 25 IWRC D. 7 x 26 IWRC
Answer: A
96. The regular materials for wire ropes are made of:
A. Chromium B. Wrought iron
C. Cast steel D. High carbon iron
 277

Answer: D
97. What is the minimum suggested design factor of wire ropes for
miscellaneous
hoisting equipment is:
A. 2 B. 3
C. 5 D. 5
Answer: C
98. To avoid excessive wear rate the recommended limiting
pressure for 6 x 19 rope is
____ for cast steel.
A. 700 psi B. 900 psi
C. 1000 psi D. 1200 psi
Answer: B
99. To avoid excessive wear rate the recommended limiting
pressure for 6 x 19 rope is
______ for manganese cast steel.
A. 2500 psi B. 2000 psi
C. 3000 psi D. 2300 psi
Answer: A
100. What friction devices that are used to connect shafts?
A. Clutches B. Spring
C. Brakes D. Holders
Answer: A

ELEMENTS 19

1. It is ideal for maximum quietness in sprocket drive operation to

choose _____ or
more teeth.
A. 25 B. 26
C. 27 D. 28
Answer: C
2. It is recommended for high speed application that the minimum
number of teeth is
small sprocket should be:
 278

A. 12 to 20 B. 18 to 24
C. 16 to 32 D. 14 to 28
Answer: B
3. Consider a maximum safe center distance of sprockets should
be ______ pitches. Very long center distance caused catenaries
tension in the chain.
A. 70 B. 80
C. 90 D. 100
Answer: B
4. The recommended lubricant for the chain drive operation is:
A. SAE 4140 B. Petroleum Oil
C. Moly Slip D. Heavy Grease
Answer: B
5. Type of leather belt being applied with waterproof cement is
called.
A. Combination of Oak/Mineral Tanned
B. Oak Tanned
C. Mineral Tanned
D. All of these
Answer: B
6. What type of leather belting should be used at an ambient
temperature above 149
deg F and possible acid liquid coming in contact with the belt?
A. Mineral Tanned B. Combination of Oak
C. Oak Tanned D. None of these
Answer: D
7. It is recommended not to have a direct drive and drive
sprockets if the ratio of their
teeth exceeds _______ use two or more step combination.
A. 10 times B. 8 times
C. 5 times D. 6 times
Answer: B
8. Flat leather belting not recommended for use in a speed in
excess of ________ fpm.
A. 3600 B. 4800
C. 6000 D. All of these
 279

Answer: C
9. V-belts operate efficiently at speed of about.
A. 4500 fpm B. 4400 fpm
C. 4200 fpm D. 3600 fpm
Answer: A
10. It is advised that in rubber belts application mounting, it should
have an initial
tension of _______ inch/ply.
A. 18 to 24 B. 15 to 20
C. 12 to 15 D. 10
Answer: B
11. Which of the following does not affect the tensile strength of
steel?
A. Sulphur B. Cobalt
C. Phosphorus D. Boron
Answer: D
12. Which of the following is an example of rectilinear translation?
A. Locomotive wheels B. Rack gear
C. Piston of an engine D. Jack
Answer: C
13. A petroleum by-product used as an electrode in an electric arc
furnace melting
operation.
A. Anthracite coke B. Foundry coke
C. Graphite electrodes D. Bituminous coke
Answer: C
14. A machine shop equipment that can flatten horizontally,
vertically or angular
plane.
A. Shaper machine B. Welding machine
C. Drill machine D. Power saw
Answer: A
15. What type of leather belting should be used at an ambient
temperature above
1400F and possible acid liquid coming in contact with the
belt?
 280

A. Mineral tanned B. Combination of oak

C. Oak tanned D. None of these
Answer: D
16. The material for engine radiator is usually made of:
A. Yellow brass B. Silicon brass
C. Admiralty brass D. Navy brass
Answer: A
17. What factors can modify the recommended cutting speed of
known work piece?
A. Rough cutting of work piece
B. Modify the shape of the cutting tools
C. Used correctly shaped cutting tools
D. Depth of cut
Answer: D
18. In a cutting tool, the cutting end can also be generally called:
A. End cutting edge B. Nose
C. Back rake D. Side rake
Answer: B
19. What equation to be used in computing the acceleration of the
center of a rolling
ball with a diameter of 8 inches?
A. 0 B. rω2
C. ω /r
2 D. v2/r
Answer: B
20. From experience specify the conventional limit of flywheel
operations to be at
6000 ft/min for cast iron and _____ for cast steel.
A. 7000 B. 8000
C. 10000 D. 12000
Answer: D
21. In shear pin or breaking pin design, we may use the data
experienced by Link-Belt
for 1/8 inch pins and the breaking stress is ______ ksi.
A. 40 B. 55
C. 50 D. 48
Answer: C
 281

22. A type of V-belts to use in a driving pulley with speed of 360

rpm and transmitting
5 hp.
A. Type C belts B. Type B belts
C. Type A belts D. Type D belts
Answer: B
23.Belt slip may take place because of:
A. Loose Load B. Heavy Belt
C. Driving pulley too small D. All of these
Answer: D
24. A single ply leather belt running at a belt velocity of 300 ft/min
is likely to transmit
____ per inch of width.
A. 2.5 hp B. 3.0 hp
C. 4.0 hp D. 5.0 hp
Answer: C
25. What is the density of a leather belt?
A. 0.035lb/in3 B. 0.0253 lb/in3
C. 0.046 lb/in 3 D. 0.074 lb/in3
Answer: A
26. What is the density of flat rubber belt material?
A. 0.055 lb/in3 B. 0.045 lb/in3
C. 0.0725 lb/in 3 D. 0.0726 lb/in3
Answer: B
27. The breaking strength of oak tanned belting varies from 3 to
more than.
A. 5 ksi B. 6 ksi
C. 7 ksi D. 8 ksi
Answer: B
28. If the ends are joined by wire lacing with machine, the usual
efficiency of joint is:
A. 75% B. 85%
C. 88% D. 100%
Answer: C
29. The tension in the belt due to centrifugal force increases
rapidly above.
 282

A. 2500 fpm B. 3000 fpm

C. 3500 fpm D. 4000 fpm
Answer: A
30. Experience suggests that the most economical designs are
obtained for a belt
speed of:
A. 2000 to 3000 fpm B. 3000 to 4000 fpm
C. 4000 to 4500 fpm D. 4000 to 4000 fpm
Answer: C
31. If a set of spur gears are made installed and lubricated
properly, they normally may
be subjected to failures like:
A. Tooth spalling B. Tooth peening
C. Pitting D. Shearing
Answer: C
32. Normally, cast iron contains 2% carbon or more and silicon in
the range of ____ %.
A. 1 to 3 B. 2 to 4
C. 2 to 3 D. 1 to 6
Answer: A
33. A major component of cast steel is:
A. Silicon B. Iron
C. Manganese D. Chromium
Answer: B
34. The application of electrical current to the corrosion circuit to
counter the
corrosion reaction is called:
A. Cathodic protection B. Sacrificial anodes
method
C. Chemical corrosion process D. Galvanic action
Answer: A
35. As a rule of thumb, the depth of foundation could be about 3.2
to _____ times the
engine stroke.
A. 4.20 B. 4.0
C. 3.40 D. 3.80
 283

Answer: A
36. Bevel gears subjected to corrosion and lightly loaded are
usually made of:
A. Bronze B. Brass
C. Duralumin D. All of these
Answer: D
37. The characteristics of tool steel sustain shocks and major
impacts are due to its:
A. Toughness B. Stiffness
C. Ductility D. Machinability
Answer: A
38. The flux that should be provided in soldering electrical
connection or commutator
wires as it tends to corrode the connections.
A. Sal ammoniac B. Zinc chloride
C. Stearin D. Acid fluxes
Answer: D
39. Treatment process that produces a residual compressive
stress at the surface
(which occupy more volume) and residual tension on the
inside that results in
considerable increase in fatigue strength for members on
torsion/bending.
A. Partial quenching B. Heavy oil quenching
C. Quenching D. Shallow quenching
Answer: D
40. A good general purpose deoxidizer and promotes fine grain in
steel.
A. Copper B. Magnesium
C. Molybdenum D. Silicon
Answer: D
41 For leather belts, recommended speed is:
A. 2000 to 3000 fpm B. 4000 to 5000 fpm
C. 6000 to 7500 fpm D. 7000 to 8000 fpm
Answer: D
42. For fabric belts, recommended speed is:
 284

A. 2000 to 3000 fpm B. 2,000 and more fpm

C. 3000 to 4000 fpm D. 4000 to 4500 fpm
Answer: B
43. On high speed, centrifugal blowers, it has been observed that
the arc of contact
reduced from 180 deg at rest to _____ in motion.
A. 90 deg B. 95 deg
C. 100 deg D. 110 deg
Answer: D
44. The recommended initial tension of belt is:
A. 75 lb/in of width B. 71 lb/in of width
C. 73 lb/in of width D. 80 lb/in of width
Answer: B
45. The recommended net belt pull for rubber belt is:
A. 11.34 lb/ply per inch of width B. 13.75 lb/ply per
inch of width
C. 16.35 lb/ply per inch of width D. 20.34 lb/ply per
inch of width
Answer: B
46. If two intersecting shafts are to be belt connected, hoe many
guide pulley is used?
A. 1 B. 2
C. 3 D. 4
Answer: B
47. Two shafts at right angles to each other may be connected by
the _____
arrangement.
A. Half turn B. Three-fourths turn
C. One turn D. Quarter turn
Answer: D
48. It offers long life, high efficiency and low cost and low
maintenance.
A. Flat belt B. V-belt
C. Tooth belt D. All of these
Answer: A
 285

49. It is used to connect pulleys or to convey materials by

transmitting motion and
power.
A. Rope B. Wires
C. Belt D. Flat
Answer: C
50. A crossed belt wider than _____ inches should be avoided.
A. 7 B. 8
C. 9 D. 10
Answer: B
51. Surface connecting the crest and roots of the screw thread.
A. Lead angle B. Length of engagement

C. Top land D. Flank

Answer: D
52. It is hardening treatment whereby a cast metal is being heated
to a very high
temperature then suddenly subjected to rapid cooling to
improve hardenability of
wear resistance is called:
A. Annealing B. Normalizing
C. Tempering D. Quenching
Answer: D
53. Moment of inertia is also called:
A. Modulus of elasticity B. Weep strength
C. Radius of gyration D. None of these
Answer: D
54. Nickel – chromium – molybdenum steel designation, SAE:
A. SAE51XX B. SAE74XX
C. SAE94XX D. SAE64XX
Answer: C
55. It is the name applied to reciprocating circular motion as that a
pendulum.
A. Intermittent motion B. Reciprocating motion

C. Oscillation D. Momentum
 286

Answer: C
56. Avoidance of vibration in equipment of machinery foundations,
a mass of weight
equal to _____ times the forces are needed.
A. 10 to 20 B. 8 to 15
C. 15 to 20 D. 8 to 10
Answer: A
57. Commonly used/produced screws/bolts/nuts and for
engineering applications is a
_____ series.
A. UNC B. ANSI
C. Withworth D. UNF
Answer: A
58. It indicates how many times a volume of material is heavier
than an equal volume
of water.
A. Specific gravity B. Specific volume
C. Specific weight D. Specific density
Answer: A
59. Axially located rectangular groove in a hub and shaft.
A. Keyseat B. Cotter pin set
C. Flute D. Setscrew point
Answer: A
60. The amount by which the dedendum in a given gear/pinion
exceeds the dedendum
of its mating pinion/gear. Also the radial distance between
the top of a tooth and
the bottom of the mating tooth space.
A. Tip relief B. Top land
C. Clearance D. Space
Answer: C
61. If the pulley ratio is 3:1 or more, the reduction should be:
A. 25% B. 50%
C. 75% D. 95%
Answer: B
62. The advantage of flat belting is that:
 287

A. It can be used with high-speed drives

B. It can be used in dusty and abrasive environments
C. It allows long distances between shafts
D. All of these
Answer: D
63. The best leather has an ultimate strength of about:
A. 3000 psi B. 4000 psi
C. 5000 psi D. 6000 psi
Answer: B
64. Initial tensions should range from ____ fro leather belts and 10
to 12 lb/ply per
inch of width for rubber belts.
A. 200 to 240 psi B. 220 to 260 psi
C. 240 to 280 psi D. 260 to 300 psi
Answer: A
65. The density of a balata belt is:
A. 0.031 lb/in3 B. 0.42 lb/in3
C. 0.51 lb/in3 D. 0.61 lb/in3
Answer: B
66. In the selection of the proper belt, it is not considered good
practice to use single-
ply leather belts more than ____ wide.
A. 6 in. B. 7 in.
C. 8 in. D. 9 in.
Answer: C
67. According to the Goodrich company, the permissible net belt
pull is _____ that it
gives a simple means for quick estimation.
A. 13.75 lb/ply per inch of width B. 15.75 lb/ply per inch of
width
C. 16.75 lb/ply per inch of width D. 17.75 lb/ply per inch of
width
Answer: A
68. Which type of chain is used in motorcycle?
A. Bush roller B. Pintle
C. Silent D. None of these
 288

Answer: A
69. The minimum number of teeth on the smaller sprocket for low
speeds is:
A. 12 B. 14
C. 16 D. 18
Answer: A
70. The minimum number of teeth on the smaller sprocket for
moderate speeds is:
A. 15 B. 17
C. 19 D. 21
Answer: B
71. Deflection of a beam is:
A. Proportional to the modulus elasticity and moment of
inertia
B. Proportional to the load imposed and inversely to the
length squared
C. Inversely proportional to the modulus of elasticity and
moment of inertia
D. Inversely proportional to the weight imposed time the
length
Answer: C
72. The normal density of work space requirement to use in the
design of a work room
is _____ cubic feet per person.
A. 400 B. 388
C. 353 D. 424
Answer: D
73. Safety features that must be placed and maintained at
Machine, Blacksmith,
Welding and Foundry shops.
A. Walkway guide B. Safety notices
C. Safety goggles D. Safety notices in
markers/boards
Answer: D
74. It is a symbol that the work surfaces should be machined-
finished and usually
 289

indicated in the drawing and placed on line that represent the

surface to be
machined.
A. f B. 5
C. 20 D. F.A.O
Answer: A
75. Web is a part of a drill and is usually thicker _______.
A. Beside the land B. nearing the shank
C. Close to the future D. At the tip portion
Answer: B
76. A carbon content in the range of ______ in steel readily
responds to heat treatment.
A. 0.35 to 0.40%C B. 0.28 to 0.30%C
C. 0.18 to 0.25%C D. 0.12 to 0.15%C
Answer: A
77. The soldering material commonly applied for automobile
radiator cores and
roofing seams.
A. 15/85% tin and lead B. 50/50% tin and lead

C. 45/55% tin and lead D. 20/80% tin and

lead
Answer: C
78. A research agency handling assistance to all foundry, machine
shop and
metallurgical plant operation.
A. MIRDC B. BOI
C. DOST D. All of these
Answer: A
79. An act of cutting out a piece of metal at a desired shape and
size.
A. Broaching B. Blanking
C. Slitting D. Dinking
Answer: B
80. The surface of the gear between the fillets of adjacent teeth is
called:
 290

A. Bottom land B. Flank

C. Top land D. Flank of tooth
Answer: A
81. The minimum number of teeth on the smaller sprocket for high
speeds is:
A. 19 B. 21
C. 23 D. 25
Answer: B
82. For maximum quietness, use sprockets with _____ or more
teeth.
A. 21 B. 23
C. 25 D. 27
Answer: D
83. For the average application a center distance equivalent to
______ pitches of
chain represents good practice.
A. 10 to 20 B. 20 to 30
C. 30 to 50 D. 40 to 60
Answer: C
84. The tension ratio of flat belt is:
A. 2 B. 3
C. 4 D. 5
Answer: B
85. The tension ratio of V-belt is:
A. 2 B. 3
C. 4 D. 5
Answer: D
86. Balata belt is about _____ stronger than rubber.
A. 10% B. 15%
C. 20% D. 25%
Answer: D
87. The coefficient of friction between the belt and the pulley for
leather belt running
on steel pulley is:
A. 0.1 B. 0.2
C. 0.3 D. 0.5
 291

Answer: C
88. The capacity of a crossed belt should be reduced to ________
that of an open belt.
A. 25% B. 50%
C. 60% D. 75%
Answer: D
89. What is the usual factor of safety used with leather belts?
A. 3 B. 5
C. 7 D. 10
Answer: D
90. In practice, it is found that arcs less than ______ require high
belt tensions.
A. 1550 B. 1650
C. 1750 D. 1800
Answer: B
91. In drilling soft materials use cutting angle as low as 40
degrees but for extremely
hard material up to ______ degrees is recommended.
A. 80 B. 65
C. 75 D. 70
Answer: A
92. The ideal thickness of the cutter at the pitchline for cutting
helical gears should be
______ of normal circular pitch.
A. 3//8 B. ¾
C. ½ D. 5/16
Answer: C
93. Progressive change of position of a body is called:
A. Acceleration B. Momentum
C. Motion D. Force
Answer: C
94. In designing gears for power transmission, consider an
efficiency of ______ as
recommended.
A. 96% or more B. 89% or more
C. 85% or more D. 98% or more
 292

Answer: D
95. The five principal parts of the shaper are: the table, tool slide,
base, ram and ____.
A. Column B. Vise
C. Drive motor D. Apron
Answer: B
96. It is a good design practice for steel lineshafting to consider a
limit to the linear
deflection of _____ inch/foot length maximum.
A. 0.050 B. 0.010
C. 0.020 D. 0.060
Answer: B
97. The conical surface at the starting end of the thread is called:
A. Pitch cone B. Chamfer
C. Crest D. Flute
Answer: B
98. For ordinary steel, the modulus of elasticity usually falls
between _____ million
pounds.
A. 20 to 31 B. 35 to 45
C. 20 to 35 D. 25 to 30
Answer: A
99. The modulus of elasticity for metals in compression is usually
taken as that in:
A. Tension B. Bearing
C. Yield D. Ultimate
Answer: A
100. Which of the following is the ratio of moment and stress?
A. Strain B. Section modulus
C. Contraction D. Passion’s ratio
Answer: B
 293

ELEMENTS 20

1. The minimum recommended worm pitch diameter is ¼ in and

the maximum is:
A. 1 ¾ in B. 2 ¾ in
C. 3 in D. 2 in
Answer: D
2. Vertex distance is a term used in _____ gearing.
A. Spiral B. Worm
C. Bevel D. Zerol
Answer: C
3. The arc of action to circular pitch or length of action to base
pitch.
A. Approach B. Contact Ratio
C. Arc of Action D. Arc of Approach
Answer: B
 294

4. Recommended hardness of pinion for helical/herringbone gear

tooth should be
_____ BHN point to sustain life.
A. 50 – 58 B. 48 – 65
C. 40 – 50 D. 30 – 60
Answer: C
5. In designing gears of power transmission consider an efficiency
of _____ as
recommended.
A. 96% or more B. 89% or more
C. 85% or more D. 98% or more
Answer: D
6. The surface of the gear between the fillets of adjacent teeth is
called:
A. Bottom Land B. Flank
C. Top Land D. Flank of Tooth
Answer: A
7. Bevel gears subjected to corrosion and lightly loaded are
usually made of:
A. Bronze B. Brass
C. Duralumin D. All of these
Answer: D
8. If a set of spur gears are made installed and lubricated properly,
they normally may
be subjected to failures like:
A. Tooth Spalling B. Tooth Penning
C. Pitting D. Shearing
Answer: C
9. Which of the following is an example of rectilinear translation?
A. Locomotive Wheels B. Rack Gear
C. Piston of an engine D. Jack
Answer: C
10. For economical cost in the manufacturing large worm gears,
the following
materials are usually applied:
A. Bronze rim with cast steel spider
 295

B. Cast iron rim with bronze spider

C. Cast steel rim with brass spider
D. Alloyed aluminum rim with cast iron spider
Answer: A
11. What is the flexural stress when a symmetrically cross-section
beam when the
vertical shear is maximum.
A. Infinity B. Zero
C. Maximum D. Minimum
Answer: B
12. The riveted joints in ASME Code has a design surface
compressive stress _____
higher than the design tensile stress.
A. 70% B. 60%
C. 35% D. 50%
Answer: B
13. What is the ratio of the minimum strength of joint to the
strength of solid joint to
the strength of solid joint in the pressure vessel?
A. Efficiency B. Relative strength
C. Performance factor D. Joint efficiency
Answer: B
14. What is the usual factor of safety for a pressure vessel?
A. 4 B. 1.5
C. 3 D. 5
Answer: D
15. It is the permissible variation of the size.
A. Tolerance B. Limits
C. Fits D. None of these
Answer: A
16. Considering that there is no fit, what is the permissible liberal
tolerance in
machining work?
A. ± 0.010 B. ± 0.090
C. ± 0.020 D. ± 0.050
Answer: A
 296

17. Which of the following is a tolerance where the size of a part

may be larger only,
or smaller only, than the given dimension?
A. Unilateral B. Lateral
C. Bilateral D. None of these
Answer: A
18. A tolerance where the size of a part is permitted to be either
larger or smaller than
the given dimension.
A. Unilateral B. Lateral
C. Bilateral D. None of these
Answer: C
19. Which of the following is the basis for ASA fits?
A. Basic number system B. Basic hole system
C. Basic size system D. Unit system
Answer: B
20. When the hole is smaller than the shaft, it will take force or
pressure to put the
cold parts together. In such case the allowance is negative.
Which of the following
terms in appropriate for such allowance?
A. Negative fits of metals B. Interference of metal
C. Positive fits of the shaft D. Intangible fits
Answer: B
21. Intermediate gear is also called _____ gear in a gear train
engagement.
A. Idler B. Pinion
C. Third Gear D. Mounted Gear
Answer: A
22. The distance of a helical gear or worm would thread along its
axis in one revolution
if it were to move axially is called:
A. Lead B. Thread
C. Pitch D. Land
Answer: A
23. Range of helix angle on helical gear is ______.
 297

A. Less than 18 B. 15 – 25
C. 20 – 35 D. 35 – 40
Answer: B
24. What will be the effect in bushing gears without backlash?
A. Jamming B. Overheating
C. Overload D. All of these
Answer: D
25. The amount by which the width of a tooth space exceeds the
thickness of the
engaging tooth on the pitch circles.
A. Backlash B. Clearance
C. Undercut D. Chordal Thickness
Answer: A
26. Height of tooth above pitch circle or radial distance between
pitch circles and top
land of the tooth is called:
A. Top Tooth B. Addendum
C. Land D. Hunting
Answer: B
27. In involutes teeth, the pressure angle is often defined as the
angle between the line of action and the line of tangent to the
pitch circle. It is termed as:
A. Helix Angle B. Angle of Recess
C. Angle of obliquity D. Arc of Action
Answer: C
28. The reciprocal of a diametral pitch or the ratio of pitch
diameter to number of
teeth is called:
A. Lead B. Module
C. Involute D. Clearance
Answer: B
29. For evenly distributed and uniform wear on each meshing gear
tooth, the ideal
design practice is to consider a:
A. Wear resistance alloy addition to tooth gear
B. Heat treatment of the gears
 298

C. Hardening of each
D. Hunting tooth addition
Answer: D
30. _______ is used to transmit power at high velocity ratios
between non-intersecting
shafts that are usually but not necessarily at right angle.
A. Helical Gear B. Bevel Gear
C. Worm Gear D. Spiral Gear
Answer: C
31. What is the direction of the predominant surface pattern?
A. Smoothness B. Waviness
C. Lay D. Roughness
Answer: C
32. It is the irregularities of departures from the nominal surface of
greater spacing
than roughness.
A. Waviness B. Roughness
C. Lay D. Smoothness
Answer: A
33. It is the surface finish of micrometer in rms.
A. 1 B. 2
C. 3 D. 4
Answer: A
34. It is the process of pre-stressing or over-stressing of a hollow
cylindrical member
beyond the elastic range.
A. Presstage B. Autofrettage
C. Stress relieving D. Countersinking
Answer: B
35. It is the phenomenon occurring when two touching surfaces
have a high contact
pressure and when these surfaces have minute relative
motion.
A. Prestressing B. Fretting
C. Friction D. Carving
Answer: B
 299

36. Which of the following gears has the simplest type of teeth?
A. Helical gears B. Spur gears
C. Bevel gears D. Worm gears
Answer: B
37. In gears, an imaginary circle on which the lever arm is based
in:
A. Base circle B. Pitch circle
C. Addendum circle D. Clearance circle
Answer: B
38. It is the circle tangent to the addendum of the meshing gears.
A. Clearance circle B. Base circle
C. Addendum circle D. Pitch circle
Answer: A
39. The distance form a point on one gear to the corresponding
point measured along
the base circle.
A. Normal pitch B. Circular pitch
C. Axial pitch D. Diametral pitch
Answer: A
40. A line passing through the pitch point that is tangent to both
base circles of a gear
is:
A. Pressure line B. Perpendicular line
C. Tangent line D. Center line
Answer: A
41. In gear design, the ratio of the pitch diameter, in inches to the
number of teeth is
called:
A. Module B. Diametral Pitch
C. English Module D. Circular Pitch
Answer: C
42. The concave portion of the tooth profile where it joints the
bottom of the tooth
fillet curve is called:
A. Fillet Curve B. Fillet Radius
C. Bottom Depth D. Fillet
 300

Answer: A
43. The distance of the tooth, which is equal to the sum of the
addendum and
dedendum is known as:
A. Full Depth B. Whole Depth
C. Working Depth D. Dedendum
Answer: B
44. It is used to change rotary motion to reciprocating motion.

A. Helical Gear B. Rack Gear

C. Worm Gear D. Spur Gear
Answer: B
45. Tooth width measured along the chord at the pitch circle is
known as:
A. Flank B. Face Width
C. Width of face D. Chordal Thickness
Answer: D
46. ________ is the difference of addendum and dedendum,
which is equivalent to
the whole depth less working depth.
A. Fillet Space B. Fillet Radius
C. Clearance D. Backlash
Answer: C
47. For moderate speed of mating gears, the ideal ratio contact is:
A. 1.25 – 4.00 B. 1.20 – 1.45
C. 1.00 – 1.30 D. 1.35 – 1.45
Answer: A
48. The distance a helical gear or worm would thread along its
axis in one revolution if
it were free to move axially is called:
A. Length of Action B. Length of Contact
C. Land D. Lead
Answer: D
49. Hypoid gear is a special type of gear like:
A. Worm Gear B. Spur Gear
C. Herring Gear D. Bevel Gear
 301

Answer: D
50. What type of gear is used for high-speed operation?
A. Helical B. Spur
C. Bevel D. Worm
Answer: A
51. Which of the following is the contact ratio for a good gear
design?
A. 1.5 : 1 B. 1 : 1.3
C. 1 : 3 D. 1.2 : 2
Answer: A
52. In pressure vessels, which of the following resists internal
pressure through
tension?
A. Shell-type element B. Cam type element
C. Plate-type element D. Spherical type
element
Answer: A
53. In pressure vessels, which of the following resists internal
pressure through
bending?
A. Shell-type element B. Cam type element
C. Plate-type element D. Spherical type
element
Answer: C
54. Which of the following flanges is suitable for low and moderate
pressure?
A. Ring-flange B. Lap joint flange
C. Tapered-hub flange D. Welding neck type
Answer: A
55. It is the study of the body’s motion independent of the forces
on the body.
A. Kinetics B. Dynamics
C. Kinematics D. Mechanics
Answer: C
56. What is the reciprocal of the velocity ratio?
A. Train value B. Ratio factor
 302

C. Modular value D. None of these

Answer: A
57. It is a type of both finished all over and has usually having
coarse threads.
A. Coupling bolt B. Stud bolt
C. Machine bolt D. Automobile bolt
Answer: A
58. It is a type of bolt distinguishing by a short portion of the shank
underneath the
head being square or finned or ribbed.
A. Coupling bolt B. Stud bolt
C. Machine bolt D. Carriage bolt
Answer: D
59. It is a type of bolt threaded on both ends and can be used
where a through bolt impossible.
A. Coupling bolt B. Carriage bolt
C. Stud bolt D. Machine bolt
Answer: C
60. It is a cheap variety of bolt made in small sizes.
A. Stud bolt B. Stove bolt
C. Machine bolt D. Coupling bolt
Answer: B
61. In a pair of gears, _______ is the plane perpendicular to the
axial plane and
tangent to the pitch surface.
A. Pitch B. Pitch Plane
C. Pitch Circle D. Pitch Point
Answer: B
62. What type of gear, which can transmit power at a certain
angle?
A. Helical Gear B. Worm Gear
C. Bevel Gear D. Herringbone Gear
Answer: C
63. _____ commonly used in a parallel shaft transmission
especially when a smooth
 303

continuous action is essential as in high speed drives up to

12,000 fpm.
A. Bevel Gear B. Herringbone Gear

C. Spur Gear D. Helical Gear

Answer: B
64. The hardness of helical and herringbone gear teeth after heat
treatment is 210 to
300 brinell Hardness for gear and pinion is at _______.
A. 360 Brinell minimum B. 400 Brinell maximum

C. 340 – 350 normal D. All of these

Answer: C
65. The path of contact involute gears where the force/power is
actually transmitted,
it is a straight imaginary line passing through the pitch point
and tangent to the
base circle is known as ______.
A. Principal Reference Plane B. Pitch Point
C. Front Angle D. Line of Action
Answer: D
66. _________ is the angle at the base cylinder of an involute
gear that the tooth
makes with the gear axis.
A. Base Helix Angle B. Pressure Angle
C. Arc of Recess D. Arc of Approach
Answer: A
67. Fillet Radius in machine parts I usually introduced to:
A. Improve the look of the path
B. Reduce concentration of stress and extend life of the
parts
C. Avoid obstruction
D. Necessary to lessen casting weight
Answer: B
68. A type of gear tooth cut inside a cylinder or ring is termed as:
A. Rack Gear B. Ring Gear
 304

C. Miter Gear D. Internal Gear

Answer: D
69. The length of arc between the two sides of a gear tooth on he
pitch circle.
A. Circle Thickness B. Axial Plane
C. Helix Angle D. Chordal Curves
Answer: A
70. Which of the following materials to be utilized to reduce cost in
the manufacture
of large worm gears?
A. Alloyed Aluminum
B. Bronze Rim with Cast Iron Spider
C. Cast Iron Rim with Bronze Spider
D. All of these
Answer: B
71. It is a locking device that is used to maintain pressure between
threads of the bolt
and nut.
A. Gasket B. Lock washer
C. Look nuts D. Filler
Answer: B
72. What is the large wood screw used to fasten machinery and
equipment?
A. Lag screw B. Loss screw
C. Wood screw D. Cross screw
Answer: A
73. What is the minimum length of contact in a tapped hole for
cast iron?
A. 1.7 D B. 1.5 D
C. 1.2 D D. 2.1 D
Answer: B
74. It is the ratio of the mean diameter of coil over the coil
diameters.
A. Wahl factor B. Spring index
C. Coil ratio D. Lead scale
Answer: B
 305

75. What is the overall length of the spring when it is compressed

until all adjacent
coils touched?
A. Free length B. Solid length
C. Compressed length D. Expansion length
Answer: B
76. It is the length of a coil spring under no load.
A. Compressed length B. Free length
C. Solid length D. None of these
Answer: B
77. In general, the steel springs are made of relatively of relative
high carbon steel
usually:
A. 5% B. Less than 0.5%
C. More than 0.5% D. 7.5%
Answer: C
78. It is a low cost spring material, suitable where service is not
severe and
dimensional precision is not needed.
A. Helical spring wire B. Stainless steel
C. Hard drawn wire spring D. Copper
Answer: C
79. What is the hard drawn (80% reduction) spring wire made of
high carbon steel?
A. Oil tempered wire B. Music wire
C. Tension wire D. Chromium wire
Answer: B
80. Which of the following wires with good quality and is used for
impact loading.
A. Hard drawn wire B. Cold drawn wire
C. Helical spring wire D. Chromium-silicon wire
Answer: D
81. A circle bounding the bottom of the teeth.
A. Addendum Circle B. Addendum Cylinder
C. Pitch Circle D. Dedendum Circle
Answer: D
 306

82. _______ is one in which angle is 90 degrees that is the pitch

cone has become a
plane.
A. Crown Gear B. Angular Gear
C. Miter Gear D. Spiral Gear
Answer: A
83. A ______ formed by elements, which are perpendicular to the
elements of the
pitch cone at the large end.
A. Cone Distance B. Back Cone
C. Root Cone D. Cone Center
Answer: B
84. A bevel gear of the same size mounted on a shaft at 90
degrees is called:
A. Crown Gear B. Spur Gear
C. Angular Gear D. Miter Gear
Answer: D
85. Gearing in which motion or power that is transmitted depends
upon the friction
between the surfaces in contact.
A. Bevel Gears B. Spur Friction wheels

C. Evans Friction Cones D. Friction Gearing

Answer: D
86. Wheels are sometimes used for the transmission of high
power when an
approximately constant velocity ratio is desired is called:
A. Bevel Cones B. Friction Gearing
C. Spur Friction Wheels D. Evans Friction Wheels
Answer: C
87. The frustums of two cones used in a manner to permit a
variation of velocity ratio
between two parallel shafts are called:
A. Evans Friction Cones B. Bevel Cones

C. Spherical Cones D. Friction

 307

Answer: A
88. If gears cannot, parallel shafts, they are called:
A. Cycloidal Gears B. Helical Gears
C. Spur Gears D. Toothed Gears
Answer: A
89. _______ is used to transmit power between shafts axis of
which it intersect.
A. Spur Gears B. Bevel Gears

C. Helical Gears D. Straight Bevel Gears

Answer: B
90. The space between the adjacent teeth is called:
A. Tooth B. Flank
C. Backlash D. width
Answer: D
91. When heat-treated wire is coiled cold, it should be stress
relieved for bending
stress and after cooling it is heated at some.
A. 4000F B. 6000F
C. 7000F D. 5000F
Answer: D
92. Which of the following is not a function of spring?
A. Absorbs energy B. Source of potential energy

C. Measure weight D. Measure thickness

Answer: D
93. Which of the following is the type of spring made in the form of
dished washer?
A. Air spring B. Bellevile spring
C. Volute spring D. Motor spring
Answer: B
94. What is the type of failure due to unstability?
A. Buckling B. Slenderness ratio
C. Stability D. Euler’s failure
Answer: A
 308

95. What type of formula that is best applied to a very slender

column?
A. Column formula B. Slenderness formulas
C. Moment formulas D. Euler formula
Answer: D
96. If two principal stresses is zero, the state of stress is:
A. Biaxial B. Mono-axial
C. Uniaxial D. Triaxial
Answer: C
97. What do you call the system that has finite values of principal
stresses?
A. Triaxial B. Uniaxial
C. Monoaxial D. Biaxial
Answer: A
98. A screw that requires positive torque to lower the load, or to
loosen the screw if it
has been turned tight against a resistance.
A. Power screw B. Lock screw
C. Self screw D. Self locking screw
Answer: D
99. What is the direction of the predominant surface pattern?
A. Smoothness B. Waviness
C. Lay D. Roughness
Answer: C
100. It is the irregularities of departures from the nominal surface
of greater spacing
than roughness.
A. Waviness B. Roughness
C. Lay D. Smoothness
Answer: A